Download Print this page

Subaru B9 TRIBECA WX 2007 Manual

Table Of Contents

page of 861

/ 861
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Advertisement

Table of Contents

asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分

Foreword

FOREWORD

1. Foreword

A: FOREWORD

These manuals are used when performing mainte-

nance, repair or diagnosis of Subaru B9 TRIBECA.

Applicable model:

2007MY WX*****

The manuals contain the latest information at the

time of publication. Changes in the specifications,

methods, etc. may be made without notice.

FW-2

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the B9 TRIBECA WX 2007 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Subaru B9 TRIBECA WX 2007

Page 1 Foreword FOREWORD 1. Foreword A: FOREWORD These manuals are used when performing mainte- nance, repair or diagnosis of Subaru B9 TRIBECA. Applicable model: 2007MY WX***** The manuals contain the latest information at the time of publication. Changes in the specifications, methods, etc.
Page 2 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS Page How to Use This Manuals ................2...
Page 3 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 How to Use This Manuals HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS 1. How to Use This Manuals A: HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS 1. STRUCTURE Each section consists of SCT that are broken down into SC that are divided into sections for each com- ponent.
Page 4 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 How to Use This Manuals HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS 3. COMPONENT Illustrations are provided for each component. The information necessary for repair work (tightening torque, grease up points, etc.) is described on these illustrations. Information is described using symbol. To order parts, refer to parts catalogue.
Page 5 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 How to Use This Manuals HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS 4. SPECIFICATION If necessary, specifications are also included. 5. INSPECTION Inspections to be carried out before and after maintenance are included. 6. MAINTENANCE • Maintenance instructions for serviceable parts describe work area and detailed step with illustration. It also describes the use of special tool, tightening torque, caution for each procedure.
Page 6 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 How to Use This Manuals HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS 7. DIAGNOSIS Tables showing a step-by-step process make it easy to conduct diagnosis. 8. SI UNITS Measurements in these manuals are according to the SI units. Metric and yard/pound measurements are also included.
Page 7 SOHC : Single Overhead Camshaft : Exhaust Gas Recirculation : Supplemental Restraint System : Emergency Locking Retractor : Exhaust : Subaru Select Monitor : Fuse & Joint Box : Special Tool : Fusible Link : Switch : Full-time AWD : Traction Control System...
Page 8 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 SPECIFICATIONS Page B9 TRIBECA ....................2...
Page 9 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Identification IDENTIFICATION 1. Identification A: IDENTIFICATION 1. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER AND LABEL LOCATIONS The V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Numbers) is used to classify the vehicle. • POSITIONING OF THE PLATE LABEL FOR IDENTIFICATION ID-00161 Emission control label Emission control label FMVSS Radio noise label label (U.S.
Page 10 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Identification IDENTIFICATION • REAR DIFFERENTIAL ID-00114 (1) Type (label) • MODEL NUMBER LABEL ID-00160 ID-3...
Page 11 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Identification IDENTIFICATION 2. MEANING OF V.I.N. The meaning of the V.I.N. is as follows: ]4S4WX82DX74400001[ The starting and ending brackets ( ] [ ) are stop marks. Digits Code Meaning Details 1 — 3 Manufacturer body area 4S4: MPV Car line B9 TRIBECA Body type...
Page 12 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Identification IDENTIFICATION 3. MODEL NUMBER LABEL The model number label indicates the type, V.I.N. <Ref. to ID-4, MEANING OF V.I.N., IDENTIFICATION, Identification.>, applied model, option code, trim code, engine type, transmission type and the exterior color code.
Page 13 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Identification IDENTIFICATION REAR DIFFERENTIAL Code Reduction gear ratio 3.583 None OPTION U4AA Digits Code Meaning Details 1 — 2 Destination U4: U.S. For USA C0: Canada C4: Central and South America Option equipment G: Adjustment system of passenger’s seat, leather seats, driver’s memory seat, seat heaters, sunroof H: Adjustment system of passenger’s seat, sunroof I: Adjustment system of passenger’s seat, seat heaters,...
Page 14 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 RECOMMENDED MATERIALS Page Recommended Materials ................2...
Page 15 • Align the cushion rubber end of plate lift with the Use genuine parts for maximum performance and end of rubber attachment (Portion b). Also, align maintenance when conducting repairs. Subaru/FHI the protrusion portion of the supporting locations will not be responsible for poor performance result- with the end of attachment (Portion a).
Page 16 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE • Do not use the plate lift whose attachment does not reach the supporting locations. NT-00130 Supporting locations Swing arm lift Plate lift Pantograph jack Rigid rack Attachment NT-3...
Page 17 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE NT-00131 Front Rear Front crossmember Rear differential NT-4...
Page 18 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE 8. TIE-DOWNS Tie-downs are used when transporting vehicles and when using the chassis dynamo. Attach tie-down only to the specified locations on the vehicle. • Tie-down location NT-00132 Hook for tie-down • Chain direction at tie-down condition •...
Page 19 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE • Vehicle sinking volume at tie-down condition Measure the distance between the highest tire point and highest arch point before and after tie- down. Difference of measured values (sinking vol- ume) should be within 50 mm (1.97 in) and make sure to fix the vehicle securely.
Page 20 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE • NOTES Towing Precautions Lifting up four wheels (On a trailer) Towing the vehicle after lifting up all four wheels is a basic rule for AWD model. NT-00023 Rope • Check if both front and rear wheels are rotated nor- mally.
Page 21 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE CAUTION: • Check ATF, gear oil and rear differential oil before driving. • Place the shift lever in “N” position during towing. • Do not lift up the rear wheels to avoid unsteady rotation. •...
Page 22 Using general scan tools will greatly improve the ef- ficiency of repairing engine electronic controls. Subaru Select Monitor can be used to diagnose the engine, VDC, airbag and other electronically con- trolled parts.
Page 23 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Note NOTE 15.ON THE CAR WHEEL BALANCING CAUTION: • Carry out this procedures after measuring the balance of each single tire. • Set the vehicle so that the front and rear wheels are the same height. •...
Page 24 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 IDENTIFICATION Page Identification ....................2...
Page 25 • Check the vehicle after repair is in normal condition. • Make sure to provide a complete vehicle to customer. For above reasons, all SUBARU dealers (dealerships) must carry out the PDIs before delivery of vehicle. Refer to this manual unless otherwise specified.
Page 26 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION Procedure Check point 19. Seat 1. Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt. 2. Check the seat installation conditions and functionality. 3. Check that the occupant detection system for passenger’s seat operates normally.
Page 27 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 1. APPEARANCE CHECK 2) Completely close the driver’s door, and then check the smooth movement with operating door • If the vehicle is covered with protective coating, lock knob from lock to unlock several times. Set the visually check the vehicle body for damage and door lock knob (A) to lock position.
Page 28 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 5) Check that the power door lock switch on the (1) Remove the cover inside the rear gate. passenger’s side also locks and unlocks. PI-00287 PI-00285 (2) Operate the lever to check that the it opens normally.
Page 29 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 10.BATTERY • Spare tire Check the battery terminals to make sure that there are no rust or corrosions due to fluid leaks. PI-00289 (A) Spare tire PI-00250 9. OPERATION CHECK OF FRONT HOOD 11.BRAKE FLUID LOCK RELEASE SYSTEM Check that the brake fluid level is normal.
Page 30 When the settings are different from the initial set- And press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de- again in 5 seconds. Check that all the doors includ- tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to ing rear gate are unlocked.
Page 31 The following inspections show the initial settings. When the settings are different from the initial set- The alarm condition will cease in 30 seconds once tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de- the door is closed. tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to...
Page 32 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 19.SEAT 22.TEST MODE CONNECTOR 1) Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt. Turn the ignition switch to ON and check that the 2) Check that each seat provides full functionality in malfunction indicator light starts blinking.
Page 33 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 29.ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET Rear injection position: A: 72 mm (2.83 in) 1) Check the operation of the rear accessory power B: 70° socket. 2) Check operation of the accessory power socket in console box. 30.NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1) Check all display functions for normal operation.
Page 34 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 47.POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL 6) Set the AT selector lever to each gear position and check the shifting while driving the vehicle. Check that the power steering fluid level is normal. If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are found.
Page 35 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pre-delivery Inspection PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION 50.APPEARANCE CHECK 2 6) Peel the protective tape, vinyl wrapping and identification seal attached to the following places. 1) When vehicle body is covered with protective • Seats film, peel it off. •...
Page 36 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICES Page General Description ...................2 Schedule ....................3 Engine Oil ....................5 Engine Oil Filter ..................7 Spark Plug ....................8 V-belt ......................9 Fuel Line ....................10 Air Cleaner Element .................11 Cooling System ..................12 Engine Coolant ..................13 Automatic Transmission Fluid ..............15 Front &...
Page 37 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Precaution PRECAUTION 1. Precaution 6. AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT PRETEN- SIONER DISPOSAL A: CAUTION To prevent bodily injury from unexpected airbag Please clearly understand and adhere to the follow- deployment, do not dispose the airbag modules ing general precautions.
Page 38 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Precaution PRECAUTION 13.ENGINE COOLANT 2. Hose Removal/Installation Procedures and Inspection When handling engine coolant, adhere to the fol- lowing to prevent from unexpected accident. • Remove hoses according to the following in- • Never remove the radiator cap because of the structions.
Page 39 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Precaution PRECAUTION • Inspect the following points in continuous use, and replace any hoses that are damaged or defective with new parts. • Replace any hoses that are riding over the stay or spool with new parts. PC-00070 (1) Contacting the spool.
Page 40 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 NOTE Page Note ......................2...
Page 41 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Recommended Materials RECOMMENDED MATERIALS 1. Recommended Materials A: RECOMMENDED MATERIALS 1. GENERAL To insure the best performance, always use the specified oil, gasoline, adhesive, sealant, etc. or a substitute of equivalent quality. 2. FUEL Always use gasoline of the same or higher octane value than specified in the owner’s manual.
Page 42 Always use the recommended or equivalent ATF. Using material except recommended one or sub- stitute would cause trouble. Fluid Recommended materials Alternative Remarks Automatic transmission fluid Idemitsu: ATF HP Castrol: Transmax J SUBARU ATF HP — Pennzoil-Quaker State: Pennzoil ATF-J Power steering fluid DEXRON III — — Brake fluid FMVSS No.
Page 43 Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 None agent 6. REFRIGERANT Standard air conditioners on Subaru vehicles use HFC134a refrigerant. Do not mix it with other refrigerants. Also, do not use any compressor oil other than DENSO OIL 8. Air conditioner Recommended materials Item number...
Page 44 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Recommended Materials RECOMMENDED MATERIALS 9. SEAL MATERIAL Use the seal material shown in the table below, or equivalent. Recommended materi- Seal material Application point Item number Alternative Seal material • Cylinder block THREE BOND 1215 004403007 DOW CORNING’s No.
Page 45 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Recommended Materials RECOMMENDED MATERIALS RM-6...
Page 46 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION Page Pre-delivery Inspection ................2...
Page 47 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 B9 TRIBECA SPECIFICATIONS 1. B9 TRIBECA A: DIMENSION Overall length mm (in) 4,822 (189.8) Overall width mm (in) 1,878 (73.9) Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,686 (66.4) Length mm (in) 2,493 (98.1) Compartment Width mm (in) 1,475 (58.1) Height mm (in)
Page 48 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 B9 TRIBECA SPECIFICATIONS E: STEERING Type Rack and pinion Turns, lock to lock 3.44 Curb to curb 11.4 (37.4) Minimum m (ft) turning radius Wall to wall 12.1 (39.4) F: SUSPENSION Front Macpherson strut type suspension Rear Double-wishbone type suspension G: BRAKE...
Page 49 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 B9 TRIBECA SPECIFICATIONS J: WEIGHT Model 5ST-E Front kg (lb) 1,045 (2,304) 1,052 (2,320) 1,052 (2,320) 1,055 (2,325) Curb weight Rear kg (lb) 828 (1,826) 833 (1,837) 839 (1,850) 841 (1,854) (C.W.) Total kg (lb) 1,873 (4,130) 1,885 (4,156) 1,891 (4,170) 1,896 (4,181)
Page 50 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 B9 TRIBECA SPECIFICATIONS Model BASE-E 1,048 1,052 1,052 1,050 1,054 1,055 Front kg (lb) (2,310) (2,320) (2,320) (2,315) (2,324) (2,326) Curb weight Rear kg (lb) (1,900) (1,901) (1,920) (1,916) (1,916) (1,925) (C.W.) 1,910 1,914 1,923 1,919 1,923 1,928 Total...
Page 51 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 B9 TRIBECA SPECIFICATIONS Model BASE-M 1,048 1,052 1,052 1,050 1,054 1,055 Front kg (lb) (2,310) (2,320) (2,320) (2,315) (2,324) (2,326) Curb weight Rear kg (lb) (1,900) (1,901) (1,920) (1,916) (1,916) (1,925) (C.W.) 1,910 1,914 1,923 1,919 1,923 1,928 Total...
Page 52 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 PRECAUTION Page Precaution ....................2...
Page 53 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM 1. General Description 4. AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE A: COMPONENT 1. DRIVER’S AIRBAG MODULE AB-01271 (A) Bolt Tightening torque: AB-01525 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) Tightening torque: CAUTION: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) Do not reuse mounting bolts and nuts.
Page 54 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM 6. SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR 9. AIRBAG HARNESS AB-01190 AB-01275 (1) Airbag main harness (A) Bolt (2) Airbag rear harness RH Tightening torque: (3) Airbag rear harness LH 8 N·m (0.82 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb) 10.CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE CAUTION: Do not reuse mounting bolts and nuts.
Page 55 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM B: CAUTION • When checking, use a test harness (1). Damage to connector terminal cause malfunction. Do not di- • When servicing a vehicle, be sure to turn the ig- rectly apply the tester probe to connector terminal nition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground cable of airbag.
Page 56 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM • If damage, open circuit or rust is found on airbag • When airbag control module, front sub sensor, system wiring harness, do not use a soldering side airbag sensor and curtain airbag sensor are equipment to repair.
Page 57 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM • Do not disassemble driver’s airbag module, pas- senger’s airbag module, side or curtain airbag modules, or pretensioner. NG G G N N N N N N N N G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G NG G G G G G G G G G N N N N N N N N N N N N G G G G G G G G NG G G G...
Page 58 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM • When storing a removed airbag module, do not place the airbag with its pad side facing downward. Do not place any objects on the airbag module. Do not pile up the airbag module. If the airbag inflates for some rea- son when an airbag module pad is touching other objects, it may cause serious accident.
Page 59 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM 2. Airbag Connector 2. DRIVER’S AIRBAG MODULE, CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER A: PROCEDURE 1) How to disconnect: (1) Using a flat tip screwdriver, pry the push 1. POWER SUPPLY, BUCKLE SWITCH lock upward to unlock.
Page 60 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM 3. DRIVER’S AIRBAG (BETWEEN AIRBAG 4. SIDE AIRBAG MAIN HARNESS AND ROLL CONNECTOR) 1) How to disconnect: AND PASSENGER’S AIRBAG (1) Push the lock arm (A). (2) With the lock arm (A) pushed in, move the 1) How to disconnect: slide lock (B) in the direction of arrow.
Page 61 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM 5. FRONT SUB SENSOR, SIDE AIRBAG 6. PASSENGER DETECTION SYSTEM (BE- SENSOR, CURTAIN AIRBAG SENSOR AND TWEEN AIRBAG REAR HARNESS AND SEAT POSITION SENSOR SEAT HARNESS) AND BELT TENSION SENSOR 1) How to disconnect: Holding outer part (A), pull it in the direction of ar- 1) How to disconnect: row.
Page 62 Replace the following parts when the airbag is de- SYSTEM CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERA- ployed. TION, Subaru Select Monitor.> 7) Use the Subaru Select Monitor to check whether 1. FRONT COLLISION the drivers seat position sensor and the drivers and 1) Driver’s airbag module the front left/right seat belt buckle switches are op- 2) Passenger’s airbag module...
Page 63 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Inspection Locations After a Collision AIRBAG SYSTEM 2. PASSENGER’S AIRBAG MODULE 7. SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR AND CURTAIN AIRBAG SENSOR Check for the following, and replace the damaged parts with new parts. If the section of vehicle as shown in the figure is •...
Page 64 <Ref. to OD(diag)- 17, SYSTEM CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OP- ERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> CAUTION: If any of the following applies, replace the seat cushion pad and frame assembly. Do not disas- semble.
Page 65 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Driver’s Airbag Module AIRBAG SYSTEM 4. Driver’s Airbag Module B: INSTALLATION CAUTION: A: REMOVAL • Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” CAUTION: before handling the airbag module. <Ref. to AB- Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” 4, CAUTION, General Description.>...
Page 66 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Passenger’s Airbag Module AIRBAG SYSTEM 5. Passenger’s Airbag Module C: INSPECTION CAUTION: A: REMOVAL Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” CAUTION: before handling the airbag module. <Ref. to AB- Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” 4, CAUTION, General Description.> before handling the airbag module.
Page 67 NOTE: CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERATION, Remove the passenger’s side by referring to driv- Subaru Select Monitor.> er’s side. 1) Make sure that there is no foreign matter on side 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. airbag module. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery and 2) Install the side airbag module (A) to backrest wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work.
Page 68 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Airbag Module AIRBAG SYSTEM C: INSPECTION CAUTION: Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” before handling the airbag module. <Ref. to AB- 4, CAUTION, General Description.> Check for the following, and replace the damaged parts with new parts. <Ref. to AB-12, SIDE AIR- BAG MODULE, INSPECTION, Inspection Loca- tions After a Collision.>...
Page 69 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Curtain Airbag Module AIRBAG SYSTEM 7. Curtain Airbag Module B: INSTALLATION CAUTION: A: REMOVAL • Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” CAUTION: before handling the airbag module. <Ref. to AB- Refer to “CAUTION” of “General Description” 4, CAUTION, General Description.>...
Page 70 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Control Module AIRBAG SYSTEM 8. Airbag Control Module B: INSTALLATION CAUTION: A: REMOVAL • Do not reuse the bolt and nut. CAUTION: • Always use new bolts and nuts for them. • Do not disassemble the airbag control mod- •...
Page 71 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Airbag Sensor AIRBAG SYSTEM 9. Side Airbag Sensor A: REMOVAL 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery and wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work. 3) Remove the center pillar lower trim. <Ref. to EI- 44, CENTER PILLAR LOWER TRIM, REMOVAL, Side Trim.>...
Page 72 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Curtain Airbag Sensor AIRBAG SYSTEM 10.Curtain Airbag Sensor A: REMOVAL 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery and wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work. 3) Remove the rear quarter lower trim. <Ref. to EI- 45, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.>...
Page 73 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Roll Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM 11.Roll Connector A: REMOVAL 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery and wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work. 3) Remove the driver’s airbag module. <Ref. to AB- 14, REMOVAL, Driver’s Airbag Module.>...
Page 74 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Sub Sensor AIRBAG SYSTEM 12.Front Sub Sensor A: REMOVAL 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery and wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work. 3) Remove the front bumper face. <Ref. to EI-21, FRONT BUMPER FACE, REMOVAL, Front Bumper.>...
Page 75 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Sub Sensor AIRBAG SYSTEM AB-24...
Page 76: Table Of Contents
Check List for Interview ................3 General Description ...................4 Electrical Component Location ..............24 Airbag Connector ..................26 Airbag Control Module I/O Signal .............29 Subaru Select Monitor ................32 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .............38 Inspection Mode ..................39 Clear Memory Mode .................40 Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern ..........41 Airbag Warning Light Failure ..............42...
Page 77: Basic Diagnostic Procedure
Go to step 3. <Ref. to AB(diag)- 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 42, Airbag Warning 2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data Light Failure.>Go link connector. to “Airbag Warning 3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the Light Failure”.
Page 78: Check List For Interview
asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Check List for Interview AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. Check List for Interview A: CHECK Customer’s name Inspector’s name Date vehicle brought in Registration No. Odometer reading V.I.N. miles Date problem occurred Registration year Fine Cloudy Weather Rainy Snowy Others:...
Page 79: General Description
asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 3. General Description • When checking, use a test harness (1). Damage to connector terminal causes malfunction. Do not A: CAUTION directly put the tester probe on airbag connector terminal. • When servicing a vehicle, be sure to turn the ig- nition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground cable from battery, and wait for more than 20 seconds before starting work.
Page 80 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • If damage, open circuit or rust is found on airbag • The airbag module cannot be used again if de- system wiring harness, do not use a soldering ployed once. equipment to repair.
Page 81 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • When painting or performing sheet metal work on the side of the vehicle, including the side sill, center pillar and front and rear doors, remove the side airbag sensors and wiring harness of the air- bag system.
Page 82 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • When storing a removed airbag module, do not place it with the pad side facing downward. Do not place any objects on the airbag module. Do not pile airbag modules on top of each other. If the airbag inflates for some reason when an airbag module pad is touching other objects, it may cause serious accident.
Page 83 CAUTION: To measure the voltage and resistance of airbag system component, be sure to use the specified test harness. 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system. MONITOR KIT ST1B020XU0 AB(diag)-8...
Page 84 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS D ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299AG060 TEST HARNESS D Used when measuring voltage and resistance of the front seat belt buckle switch. ST98299AG060 3 4 5 6 AB-01068 AB(diag)-9...
Page 85 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS F ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299FC010 TEST HARNESS F Used when measuring voltage and resistance of airbag module harnesses. ST98299FC010 3 4 5 6 AB-00927 AB(diag)-10...
Page 86 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS H ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299FA030 TEST HARNESS H Used when measuring voltage and resistance of front sub sensor. ST98299FA030 3 4 5 6 AB-00720 AB(diag)-11...
Page 87 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS N ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299SA000 TEST HARNESS N Used when measuring voltage and resistance of driver’s airbag module, curtain airbag module and seat belt pretensioner. ST98299SA000 AB-00928 AB(diag)-12...
Page 88 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS P ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299SA020 TEST HARNESS P Used when measuring voltage and resistance of driver’s airbag module harness and passenger’s airbag module harness. ST98299SA020 AB-00679 AB(diag)-13...
Page 89 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS Q ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299SA040 TEST HARNESS Q Used when measuring voltage and resistance of driver’s airbag module. ST98299SA040 AB-00929 AB(diag)-14...
Page 90 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS U ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299AG000 TEST HARNESS U Used when measuring voltage and resistance of airbag control module. ST98299AG000 AB(diag)-15...
Page 91 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 8 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 58 57 56 55 54 53 1 2 3 5 6 7...
Page 92 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS V ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299AG010 TEST HARNESS V Used when measuring voltage and resistance of side airbag sensor and curtain airbag sensor. ST98299AG010 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 AB-00677...
Page 93 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS Y ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299AG040 TEST HARNESS Y Used for diagnosing a failure of the seat belt buckle switch. ST98299AG040 AB-01069 AB(diag)-18...
Page 94 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AB ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA000 TEST HARNESS AB Used when measuring voltage and resistance of occupant detection system. ST98299XA000 OD-00029 AB(diag)-19...
Page 95 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AC ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA010 TEST HARNESS AC Used for diagnosing a failure of the seat belt ten- sion sensor. ST98299XA010 OD-00027 AB(diag)-20...
Page 96 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AD ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA020 TEST HARNESS AD Used when measuring voltage and resistance of seat belt tension sensor. ST98299XA020 OD-00028 AB(diag)-21...
Page 97 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AE ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA030 TEST HARNESS AE • Used for diagnosing a failure of the seat belt buckle switch. • Used together with the test harness Y. ST98299XA030 OD-00026 AB(diag)-22...
Page 98 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • AIRBAG RESISTOR ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299PA040 AIRBAG RESISTOR Used in replacement of airbag module for which resistance value is same as airbag module. ST98299PA040 AB-00433 2. GENERAL TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester...
Page 99: Electrical Component Location
asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. Electrical Component Location A: LOCATION (11) AB34 (13) AB25 AB24 AB56 AB28 AB26 (23) AB61 AB69 AB16 (15) AB10 (19) AB33 (17) AB18 AB60 AB58 (22) AB52 AB51 AB17 AB38 (20) (18)
Page 100 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Connector (AB1) (AB2) (AB6) (AB7) (AB9) (AB10) (AB13) (AB16) (AB17) (AB18) (AB19) (AB20) Connector Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow color Male/Female Female Female Female Male Female Male...
Page 101: Airbag Connector
asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 5. Airbag Connector 2. DRIVER’S AIRBAG MODULE, CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER A: PROCEDURE 1) How to disconnect: (1) Using a flat tip screwdriver, pry the push 1. BUCKLE SWITCH lock upward to unlock. 1) How to disconnect: (1) Move the slide lock (A) in the direction of ar- row.
Page 102 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 3. DRIVER’S AIRBAG (BETWEEN AIRBAG 4. SIDE AIRBAG MAIN HARNESS AND ROLL CONNECTOR) 1) How to disconnect: AND PASSENGER’S AIRBAG (1) Push the lock arm (A). (2) With the lock arm (A) pushed in, move the 1) How to disconnect: slide lock (B) in the direction of arrow.
Page 103 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 5. FRONT SUB SENSOR, SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR, CURTAIN AIRBAG SENSOR AND SEAT POSITION SENSOR LH 1) How to disconnect: Holding outer part (A), pull it in the direction of ar- row. CAUTION: When pulling the slide lock or disconnecting connector, be sure to hold the connector, not...
Page 104: Airbag Control Module I/O Signal
asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Control Module I/O Signal AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 6. Airbag Control Module I/O Signal A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION AB-00937 • Terminal numbers in airbag control module connector are shown in the figure. • Airbag warning light illuminates when the connector is removed from airbag control module. AB(diag)-29...
Page 105 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Control Module I/O Signal AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Item Control module terminal No. Data link connector (1)-12 Combination meter (1)-3 Battery power supply Common use fuse (1)-6 Dedicated fuse (1)-5 Passenger’s airbag module level one (1)-10 –...
Page 106 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Control Module I/O Signal AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Item Control module terminal No. Curtain airbag sensor RH Power supply and communication (3)-19 (3)-20 (3)-18 – (3)-4 Curtain airbag module RH (3)-6 – (3)-5 Occupant detection control module (3)-1 –...
Page 107: Subaru Select Monitor
When malfunction of airbag system occurs, the DTC stored in airbag control module will be read out. 1) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to AB(diag)-8, SPECIAL TOOL, PREPARATION TOOL, General Description.> 2) Connect the diagnosis cable to Subaru Select Monitor.
Page 108 *10: Passenger’s seat airbag operating state *11: Passenger’s seat airbag non-operating state NOTE: For details concerning operation procedure, refer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MAN- UAL”. 3. CLEAR MEMORY MODE Clear the DTC stored in the airbag control module after repairing airbag system. (After the breakdown is re- covered, the breakdown code for completed recoveries are read out when the next breakdown occurs if the memory clear work is not performed.)
Page 109 Subaru Select Monitor AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) B: INSPECTION 1. COMMUNICATION FOR INITIALIZING IMPOSSIBLE DETECTING CONDITION: Defective harness connector TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Communication is impossible between the airbag control module and the Subaru Select Monitor. WIRING DIAGRAM: BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH DATA LINK CONNECTOR B402...
Page 110 MUNICATION. model year displayed on Sub- 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. aru Select Monitor? 2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, check whether communication to other system can be executed normally. CHECK AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE CON- Is the connector of the airbag Go to step 6.
Page 111 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE AIR- Is the resistance less than 10 Go to step 10. Repair the harness BAG CONTROL MODULE AND DATA LINK Ω? between the airbag CONNECTOR.
Page 112 • For detailed operation procedure, refer to “Airbag Warning Light Failure”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-42, Airbag Warning Light Failure.> • When the airbag warning light is OFF and “NO TROUBLE CODE” is displayed on Subaru Select Monitor, the system is in normal condition.
Page 113: Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (Dtc)
38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 8. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: OPERATION For details about reading DTCs, refer to “Subaru Select Monitor”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, Subaru Se- lect Monitor.> AB(diag)-38...
Page 114: Inspection Mode
asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Inspection Mode AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 9. Inspection Mode A: PROCEDURE Recreate the circumstance by referring to the con- ditions described in the checklist. AB(diag)-39...
Page 115: Clear Memory Mode
Clear Memory Mode AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 10.Clear Memory Mode A: OPERATION Clear the memory in the following steps after the malfunction is repaired. For details concerning DTC clear operation, refer to “Subaru Select Monitor”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, Subaru Select Monitor.> AB(diag)-40...
Page 116: Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern
asieps_tobira.book 41 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 11.Airbag Warning Light Illumi- nation Pattern A: INSPECTION Turn the ignition switch to ON, and confirm that the airbag warning light remains on for approx. 6 sec- onds then go off afterwards. AB-00135 (1) Airbag warning light (2) Approx.
Page 117: Airbag Warning Light Failure
asieps_tobira.book 42 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Warning Light Failure AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 12.Airbag Warning Light Failure A: AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT REMAINS ON DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag warning light is faulty. • Airbag control module to airbag warning light circuit is shorted or open. •...
Page 118 Go to step 2. Read the DTC. <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, READ nosis according to DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC), DTC. OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in connec- If the poor contact Go to step 3.
Page 119 asieps_tobira.book 44 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Warning Light Failure AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG MAIN HARNESS. Is there any defect in the airbag Replace the airbag Repair the bulk- Check the airbag main harness for defect. main harness? main harness head harness.
Page 120 asieps_tobira.book 45 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Warning Light Failure AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) B: AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT REMAINS OFF DETECTING CONDITION: • Fuse No. 5 (in fuse box) is brown out. • Body harness circuit is open. • Airbag warning light is faulty. •...
Page 121 Read the DTC. <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, READ nosis according to DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC), DTC. OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> CHECK FUSE NO. 5 (IN MAIN FUSE BOX). Go to step 4. Is the fuse No. 5 (in main fuse Replace the fuse Remove the fuse No.
Page 122: List Of Diagnostic Trouble Code (Dtc)
asieps_tobira.book 47 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 13.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: LIST Display Content of diagnosis Reference target Driver’s Airbag Failure • Airbag main harness circuit is open, shorted or <Ref. to AB(diag)-52, shorted to ground.
Page 123 asieps_tobira.book 48 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Display Content of diagnosis Reference target Passenger’s Airbag Indicator Failure • Passenger’s airbag indicator is faulty. <Ref. to AB(diag)-71, • Airbag control module is faulty. DTC 26 PASSENGER’S •...
Page 124 asieps_tobira.book 49 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Display Content of diagnosis Reference target Front Sub Sensor RH Failure Front sub sensor (RH) is faulty. <Ref. to AB(diag)-79, DTC 33 FRONT SUB SENSOR RH FAILURE, Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code.>...
Page 125 asieps_tobira.book 50 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Display Content of diagnosis Reference target Side Airbag Sensor LH Failure • Side airbag sensor (LH) is faulty. <Ref. to AB(diag)-99, • Side airbag harness (LH) circuit is faulty. DTC 52 SIDE AIRBAG •...
Page 126 asieps_tobira.book 51 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Display Content of diagnosis Reference target Belt Pretensioner LH Failure • Seat belt pretensioner (LH) circuit is shorted to <Ref. to AB(diag)-116, power supply. DTC 66 BELT PRETEN- •...
Page 127: Diagnostic Chart With Trouble Code
asieps_tobira.book 52 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 14.Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code A: DTC 11 DRIVER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag module harness (driver’s side) circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. •...
Page 128 asieps_tobira.book 53 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. harness. Check for poor contact of the connectors between the airbag control module and the driver’s airbag module.
Page 129 asieps_tobira.book 54 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG MAIN HARNESS (DRIV- Is the resistance more than 1 Go to step 6. Replace the airbag ER’S AIRBAG HARNESS). MΩ? main harness Measure the resistance between connector along with body (2U) terminals in the test harness U.
Page 130 asieps_tobira.book 55 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) B: DTC 12 PASSENGER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag module harness (Passenger’s side) circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. •...
Page 131 asieps_tobira.book 56 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. harness. Check for poor contact of the connectors between the airbag control module and the pas- senger’s airbag module.
Page 132 asieps_tobira.book 57 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 133 asieps_tobira.book 58 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) C: DTC 15 DRIVER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit (Driver’s side) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag module harness circuit (Driver’s side) is shorted to power supply. •...
Page 134 asieps_tobira.book 59 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. harness. Check for poor contact of the connectors between the airbag control module and the driver’s airbag module.
Page 135 asieps_tobira.book 60 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE. Is the same DTC displayed? Replace the airbag Go to step 6. 1) Connect all the connectors. control module. 2) Erase the memory. <Ref.
Page 136 asieps_tobira.book 61 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) D: DTC 16 PASSENGER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit (Passenger’s side) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag module harness circuit (Passenger’s side) is shorted to power supply. •...
Page 137 asieps_tobira.book 62 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. harness along with Check for poor contact of the connectors chassis harness.
Page 138 Step Check CHECK IF DTC 21 IS INDICATED. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Replace the airbag Perform the Clear Read the DTC. <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, READ tor display DTC21? control module.
Page 139 asieps_tobira.book 64 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) F: DTC 22 FRONT AIRBAG FIRING OUTPUT WIRING DIAGRAM: AB37 AB38 AB21 AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE AB26 AB17 AB18 1 2 3 4 AB17 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 STEERING ROLL CONNECTOR...
Page 140 asieps_tobira.book 65 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) This DTC is indicated when the front airbag module and the pretensioner are deployed. Once this DTC is displayed, the memory cannot be cleared. Therefore replace the following parts. •...
Page 141 asieps_tobira.book 66 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) G: DTC 23 CONNECTOR TO AIRBAG ECU DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Connection of (AB6), (AB17) and (AB18) to airbag control module is improper CAUTION: Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground terminal from battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
Page 142 asieps_tobira.book 67 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) H: DTC 24 IG1 OPEN DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag control module is faulty. • Airbag main harness circuit is open. • Fuse No. 12 (in joint box) is blown. •...
Page 143 asieps_tobira.book 68 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect control module.
Page 144 asieps_tobira.book 69 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) I: DTC 25 IG2 OPEN DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag control module is faulty. • Airbag main harness circuit is open. • Fuse No. 25 (in joint box) is blown. •...
Page 145 asieps_tobira.book 70 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect control module.
Page 146 asieps_tobira.book 71 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) J: DTC 26 PASSENGER’S AIRBAG INDICATOR FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Passenger’s seat airbag indicator is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. • Airbag main harness circuit is open. •...
Page 147 asieps_tobira.book 72 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in any Replace the airbag Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect connector? harness. the battery ground cable, and wait more than 20 seconds.
Page 148 asieps_tobira.book 73 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) K: DTC 27 ODS COMMUNICATION ERROR DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Occupant detection control module communication is faulty. • Airbag rear harness circuit is open, shorted, shorted to ground or shorted to power supply. •...
Page 149 asieps_tobira.book 74 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK THE AIRBAG HARNESS. Is the voltage 9 V or more? Replace the airbag Replace the occu- Measure the voltage between connector (2AB) rear harness RH pant detection har- in the test harness AB and chassis ground.
Page 150 asieps_tobira.book 75 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) P: DTC 31 FRONT SUB SENSOR RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Front sub sensor harness (RH) circuit is shorted. • Front sub sensor harness (RH) circuit is open. •...
Page 151 asieps_tobira.book 76 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Repair the connec- Go to step 2. TORS. tor. Check for poor contact of the connectors between the airbag control module and the front sub sensor RH.
Page 152 asieps_tobira.book 77 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Q: DTC 32 FRONT SUB SENSOR LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Front sub sensor harness (LH) circuit is shorted. • Front sub sensor harness (LH) circuit is open. •...
Page 153 asieps_tobira.book 78 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. main harness Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the front harness.
Page 154 asieps_tobira.book 79 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) R: DTC 33 FRONT SUB SENSOR RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Front sub sensor (RH) is faulty. If DTC 33 is displayed, the circuit within the front sub sensor (RH) is faulty. Replace the front sub sensor (RH).
Page 155 asieps_tobira.book 80 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) T: DTC 36 SEAT POSITION SENSOR LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Driver’s seat position sensor is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. • Airbag rear harness LH circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. CAUTION: •...
Page 156 asieps_tobira.book 81 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK SEAT POSITION SENSOR (LH). Does the airbag warning light Replace the seat Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect illuminate for 6 seconds and go position sensor the battery ground cable, and wait more than 20 off?
Page 157 asieps_tobira.book 82 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) V: DTC 38 BUCKLE SWITCH LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Driver’s seat buckle switch circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag rear harness LH circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. •...
Page 158 asieps_tobira.book 83 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT IN CONNECTORS. Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. Check for poor contact of the connectors rear harness LH between the airbag control module and the along with body buckle switch LH.
Page 159 asieps_tobira.book 84 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 160 asieps_tobira.book 85 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) W: DTC 39 SEAT BELT WARNING FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Passenger’s seat belt warning system is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. • Body integrated unit is faulty. •...
Page 161 asieps_tobira.book 86 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK THE AIRBAG HARNESS. Does the passenger’s seat belt Go to step 3. Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect warning light blink for 6 sec- the battery ground cable, and wait more than 20 onds and go off? seconds.
Page 162 asieps_tobira.book 87 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) X: DTC 41 SIDE AIRBAG RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Side airbag harness (RH) is faulty. • Side airbag module (RH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 163 asieps_tobira.book 88 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness RH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module, side airbag harness.
Page 164 asieps_tobira.book 89 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 165 asieps_tobira.book 90 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Y: DTC 42 SIDE AIRBAG LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Side airbag harness (LH) is faulty. • Side airbag module (LH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 166 asieps_tobira.book 91 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module, side airbag harness.
Page 167 asieps_tobira.book 92 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 168 asieps_tobira.book 93 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Z: DTC 45 SIDE AIRBAG RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Side airbag harness (RH) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: • Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground terminal from battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
Page 169 asieps_tobira.book 94 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness RH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module, side airbag harness.
Page 170 asieps_tobira.book 95 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AA:DTC 46 SIDE AIRBAG LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Side airbag harness (LH) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: • Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground terminal from battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
Page 171 asieps_tobira.book 96 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module, side airbag harness.
Page 172 asieps_tobira.book 97 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AB:DTC 51 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Side airbag sensor (RH) is faulty. • Side airbag harness (RH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 173 asieps_tobira.book 98 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness RH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module, side airbag harness.
Page 174 asieps_tobira.book 99 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AC:DTC 52 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Side airbag sensor (LH) is faulty. • Side airbag harness (LH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 175 asieps_tobira.book 100 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module, side airbag harness.
Page 176 asieps_tobira.book 101 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AD:DTC 53 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Side airbag sensor (RH) is faulty. When DTC 53 is displayed, the circuit within the side airbag sensor (RH) is faulty. Replace the side airbag sensor (RH).
Page 177 asieps_tobira.book 102 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AG:DTC 56 CURTAIN AIRBAG SENSOR RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Curtain airbag sensor (RH) is faulty. • Curtain airbag harness (RH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 178 asieps_tobira.book 103 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness along Check for poor contact of the connectors with body harness.
Page 179 asieps_tobira.book 104 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 180 asieps_tobira.book 105 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AH:DTC 57 CURTAIN AIRBAG SENSOR LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Curtain airbag sensor (LH) is faulty. • Curtain airbag harness (LH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 181 asieps_tobira.book 106 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness along Check for poor contact of the connectors with body harness.
Page 182 asieps_tobira.book 107 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 183 asieps_tobira.book 108 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AK:DTC 61 BELT PRETENSIONER RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Seat belt pretensioner (RH) circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag control module is faulty. •...
Page 184 asieps_tobira.book 109 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness RH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the seat harness.
Page 185 asieps_tobira.book 110 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 186 asieps_tobira.book 111 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AL:DTC 62 BELT PRETENSIONER LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Seat belt pretensioner (LH) circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag control module is faulty. •...
Page 187 asieps_tobira.book 112 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module and the seat harness.
Page 188 asieps_tobira.book 113 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 189 asieps_tobira.book 114 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AM:DTC 65 BELT PRETENSIONER RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Seat belt pretensioner (RH) circuit is shorted to power supply. • Pretensioner is faulty. • Pretensioner harness is faulty. •...
Page 190 asieps_tobira.book 115 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness RH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the seat harness.
Page 191 asieps_tobira.book 116 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AN:DTC 66 BELT PRETENSIONER LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Seat belt pretensioner (LH) circuit is shorted to power supply. • Pretensioner is faulty. • Pretensioner harness is faulty. •...
Page 192 asieps_tobira.book 117 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module and the seat harness.
Page 193 asieps_tobira.book 118 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AO:DTC 71 DRIVER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag module harness (driver’s side) circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. •...
Page 194 asieps_tobira.book 119 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. main harness Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the harness.
Page 195 asieps_tobira.book 120 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG MAIN HARNESS (DRIV- Is the resistance more than 1 Go to step 6. Replace the airbag ER’S AIRBAG HARNESS). MΩ? main harness Measure the resistance between connectors along with body (2U) in the test harness U, and between con- harness.
Page 196 asieps_tobira.book 121 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AP:DTC 72 PASSENGER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Airbag module harness (Passenger’s side) circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. •...
Page 197 asieps_tobira.book 122 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. main harness Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the pas- harness.
Page 198 asieps_tobira.book 123 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 199 asieps_tobira.book 124 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AQ:DTC 75 DRIVER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit (Driver’s side) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag module harness circuit (Driver’s side) is shorted to power supply. •...
Page 200 asieps_tobira.book 125 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. main harness Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the harness.
Page 201 asieps_tobira.book 126 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE. Is the same DTC displayed? Replace the airbag Go to step 6. 1) Connect all the connectors. control module. 2) Erase the memory. <Ref.
Page 202 asieps_tobira.book 127 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AR:DTC 76 PASSENGER’S AIRBAG FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Airbag main harness circuit (Passenger’s side) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag module harness circuit (Passenger’s side) is shorted to power supply. •...
Page 203 asieps_tobira.book 128 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. main harness Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module and the pas- harness.
Page 204 asieps_tobira.book 129 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AS:DTC 91 CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Curtain airbag harness (RH) is faulty. • Curtain airbag module (RH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 205 asieps_tobira.book 130 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness along Check for poor contact of the connectors with body harness.
Page 206 asieps_tobira.book 131 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 207 asieps_tobira.book 132 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AT:DTC 92 CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Curtain airbag harness (LH) is faulty. • Curtain airbag module (LH) is faulty. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: •...
Page 208 asieps_tobira.book 133 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module, curtain air- harness.
Page 209 asieps_tobira.book 134 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Finish the diagno- “List of Diagnostic sis. Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-47, List of Diagnostic Trou- ble Code (DTC).>...
Page 210 asieps_tobira.book 135 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AU:DTC 95 CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Curtain airbag harness (RH) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: • Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground terminal from battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
Page 211 asieps_tobira.book 136 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness RH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with body between the airbag control module, curtain air- harness.
Page 212 asieps_tobira.book 137 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) AV:DTC 96 CURTAIN AIRBAG MODULE LH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Curtain airbag harness (LH) is shorted to power supply. • Airbag control module is faulty. CAUTION: • Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect the ground terminal from battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
Page 213 asieps_tobira.book 138 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code AIRBAG SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Replace the airbag Go to step 2. TORS. rear harness LH Check for poor contact of the connectors along with the body between the airbag control module, curtain air- harness.
Page 214 Check List for Interview ................3 General Description ...................4 Electrical Component Location ..............13 Airbag Connector ..................14 Control Module I/O Signal ................15 Subaru Select Monitor ................16 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .............19 Inspection Mode ..................20 Clear Memory Mode .................21 Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern ..........22 Passenger’s Airbag ON/OFF Indicator Light Illumination Pattern ....23...
Page 215 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description BODY STRUCTURE 1. General Description A: PREPARATION TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Tram tracking gauge Used for measuring dimen- sion. Tape measure Used for measuring dimen- sion. BS-2...
Page 216 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE 2. Datum Dimensions A: MEASUREMENT NOTE: • Using a tram tracking gauge, measure all the di- mensions. • When using a tape measure, carefully measure dimensions without letting the tape measure sag or twist.
Page 217 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE 1. CENTER STRUCTURE NOTE: • Longitudinal dimensions are projected dimensions. • The height dimensions are the vertical distances from the gauge point on the assumed horizontal line through the side sill flange joint (bending angle point). •...
Page 218 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE Standard line Side sill (75) Sub frame mounting hole (sym- (83) Front crossmember mounting hole (91) Gauge hole (symmetrical) metrical) (symmetrical), rear (92) Center bearing mounting hole (76) Muffler cover mounting hole (sym- (84) Bushing rear mounting hole (sym- (93)
Page 219 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE Point of measurement Datum dimension mm (in) Point of measurement Datum dimension mm (in) (88) RH — (88) LH 796 (31.34) Datum line — (75) 225 (8.86) (89) RH — (89) LH 1,002 (39.45) Datum line —...
Page 220 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE NOTE: • Other datum points except for (92) are symmetrical. • Longitudinal dimensions are projected dimensions. • The height dimensions are the vertical distances from the gauge point on the assumed horizontal line through the side sill flange joint (bending angle point).
Page 221 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE 2. FRONT STRUCTURE (10) (15) (10) (14) (16) (11) (17) (18) (19) BS-01613 Cover upper front mounting hole Harness mounting hole (16) Front door hinge upper mounting hole (symmetrical), upper side Hood lock mounting hole Fender drip bracket mounting hole (symmetrical) Headlight temporal supporting...
Page 222 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE Point of measurement Datum dimension mm (in) (1) — (3) RH 567 (22.32) (1) — (3) LH 567 (22.32) (1) — (4) RH 779 (30.67) (1) — (4) LH 797 (31.38) (1) — (9) RH 888 (34.96) (1) —...
Page 223 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE NOTE: • The reference points (1) and (2) are at the body center, while the other points except for (3), (4), (8) and (14) are left-right symmetrical. • The dimensions are the actual dimensions between the reference points. BS-01627 BS-01629 (19)
Page 224 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE 3. INSIDE • View 1 (62) (27) (24) (49) (48) (59) (59) (47) (44) (28) (22) (43) (25) (26) (24) (41) (20) (40) (23) (25) (21) (16) (17) (18) BS-01614 (20) Rear door hinge upper mounting (26) Door switch mounting hole (sym- (44)
Page 225 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE Point of measurement Datum dimension mm (in) (16) LH — (20) LH 1,017 (40.04) (16) LH — (22) LH 1,242 (48.90) (17) LH — (21) LH 990 (38.98) (18) LH — (20) LH 1,212 (47.72) (18) LH —...
Page 226 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE (16) (22) (17) (18) BS-01633 BS-01635 (20) (24) (26) (25) (21) (23) BS-01634 BS-01637 (27) (28) BS-01638 BS-01650 (58) (41) (44) (47) (43) BS-01647 BS-01651 (62) (59) (49) (48) BS-01649 BS-01652 BS-13...
Page 227 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE • View 2 (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (43) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (43) BS-01615 (29) Front door checker mounting hole (31) Harness clip attachment hole (33) Rear door checker mounting hole (symmetrical) (symmetrical) (symmetrical)
Page 228 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE NOTE: • All reference points are left-right symmetrical. • The dimensions are the actual dimensions between the reference points. (58) (33) (44) (47) (43) BS-01636 BS-01647 (36) (29) (37) (30) BS-01643 BS-01655 (34) (42) (31)
Page 229 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE • View 3 (38) (39) (35) (36) (45) (37) (34) (46) (42) (50) BS-01616 (34) B pillar trim mounting hole (sym- (38) A pillar trim mounting hole (sym- (45) C pillar trim mounting hole (sym- metrical), upper metrical) metrical)
Page 230 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE Point of measurement Datum dimension mm (in) (34) RH — (36) RH 979 (38.54) (34) RH — (37) RH 1,018 (40.08) (34) RH — (38) RH 871 (34.29) (34) RH — (46) RH 1,154 (45.43) (35) RH —...
Page 231 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE 4. REAR (61) (57) (61) (60) (58) (53) (48) (49) (59) (54) (53) (52) (51) (63) (55) (56) (54) (55) (56) BS-01617 (51) Paint drain hole (55) D pillar cover mounting hole (sym- (60) Apron trim mounting hole (sym- metrical)
Page 232 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE NOTE: • The reference points (51) and (63) are at the body center, while the other points are left-right symmetrical. • The dimensions are the actual dimensions between the reference points. (62) (55) (63) (56)
Page 233 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE 5. SUSPENSION MOUNT (13) (12) (11) (49) (48) (75) (82) (83) (99) (11) (13) (12) (48) (49) (99) (82) (75) (83) (83) (82) (75) (99) (49) (48) (11) (13) (12) BS-01618 BS-20...
Page 234 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE Standard line Side sill Upper face Crossmember Sub frame (11) Strut mount mounting hole (sym- (48) Damper mounting hole (symmetri- (82) Front crossmember mounting hole metrical), front cal), front (symmetrical), front (12) Strut mount mounting hole (sym- (49) Damper mounting hole (symmetri-...
Page 235 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Datum Dimensions BODY STRUCTURE NOTE: • All reference points are left-right symmetrical. • Longitudinal dimensions are projected dimensions. • The height dimensions are the vertical distances from the gauge point on the assumed horizontal line through the side sill flange joint (bending angle point). •...
Page 236 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE 3. Body Sealing A: SPECIFICATION Used material: THREE BOND 4101 (004403063) : Sealing application locations BS-01704 Front hood Front door Rear door Rear gate BS-23...
Page 237 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View A BS-01657 View B BS-01705 BS-24...
Page 238 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View C BS-01659 View D View E BS-01660 BS-01661 Application not required. 50 mm (1.97 in) Do not block the water drain hole. BS-25...
Page 239 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View F View G BS-01662 BS-01663 BS-26...
Page 240 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View H BS-01712 The holes shall be blocked. The holes shall be blocked. LH side: one location RH side: two locations BS-27...
Page 241 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View I BS-01707 The holes shall be blocked. BS-28...
Page 242 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View J View K BS-01713 BS-01714 Do not block the water drain holes. Do not block the water drain holes. View L View M BS-01668 BS-01669 View N View O BS-01670 BS-01671 BS-29...
Page 243 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Body Sealing BODY STRUCTURE View P View Q BS-01708 BS-01709 View R View S BS-01674 BS-01675 BS-30...
Page 244 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE 4. Anticorrosion Wax A: SPECIFICATION Used material: Rust-stop aerosol (K0877YA015) : Application area • Door (Application thickness = 20 µm or more) :(a) BS-01677 Rust-stop aerosol Wax application work openings 50 mm (1.97 in) Application thickness = 50 µm or more 10 mm (0.39 in)
Page 245 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE • Rear gate (Application thickness = 15 µm or more) :(a) BS-01678 Rust-stop aerosol Wax application work openings 50 mm (1.97 in) Application thickness = 50 µm or more 10 mm (0.39 in) BS-32...
Page 246 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE • Front hood hinge (Application thickness = 15 µm • Rear gate hinge (Application thickness = 15 µm or more) or more) Apply around the installation outer circumference Apply around the installation outer circumference (indicated range) at two locations on the left and (plate edges) at two locations on the left and right.
Page 247 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE • Overall view 1 :(a) (7) (9) (10) (11) BS-01682 BS-34...
Page 248 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE Rust-stop aerosol View A (Application thickness = 20 Cross section B — B (Application µm or more) thickness = 15 µm or more) Front panel 10 mm (0.39 in) (11) Application thickness = 50 µm or more Reinforcement 50 mm (1.97 in)
Page 249 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE • Overall view 2 :(a) (16) (18) (12) (13) (14) (19) (20) (16) (16) (14) (21) (21) (17) (15) (17) BS-01716 BS-36...
Page 250 asieps_tobira.book 37 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE Rust-stop aerosol View C Cross section E — E Cross section F — F View D (12) Hood stay bracket (18) Apply to the mating surface (19) Apply to the side frame welded between the hood stay bracket seam.
Page 251 asieps_tobira.book 38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Anticorrosion Wax BODY STRUCTURE • Bottom view :(a) (22) (23) (24) (27) (25) (26) (26) BS-01710 Rust-stop aerosol Side frame side view Cross section H — H (Application thickness = 20 µm or more) (22) Apply to the inside of suspension (24) Reinforcement (27)
Page 252 asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Under Coat BODY STRUCTURE 5. Under Coat A: SPECIFICATION Repair material: THREE BOND 6115 1) Take care that under coat does not attach to the locations other than shown in the figures and to the fol- lowing locations.
Page 253 asieps_tobira.book 40 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Under Coat BODY STRUCTURE • Bottom view :(a) :(b) :(c) BS-01715 600 µm or more 600 µm or more 300 µm or more Film thickness in this area should Apply to the grommet. be 200 µm or more. :(a) BS-01687 600 µm or more...
Page 254 asieps_tobira.book 41 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Under Coat BODY STRUCTURE Cross section A — A Cross section B — B :( a ) :(a) :( b ) BS-01688 BS-01689 300 µm or more 600 µm or more 600 µm or more Cross section C — C (rotated 90°) View D :(a) :(a)
Page 255 asieps_tobira.book 42 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Under Coat BODY STRUCTURE View G (LH, RH) Cross section H — H :(a) :(a) :(b) BS-01694 BS-01695 600 µm or more 600 µm or more 600 µm or more The holes shall be blocked. BS-42...
Page 256 asieps_tobira.book 43 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Galvanized Sheet Metal BODY STRUCTURE 6. Galvanized Sheet Metal A: SPECIFICATION BS-01696 Galvanized on both sides BS-43...
Page 257 asieps_tobira.book 44 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Aluminium Sheet Metal BODY STRUCTURE 7. Aluminium Sheet Metal A: SPECIFICATION BS-01697 BS-44...
Page 258 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO Page General Description ...................2 Combination Meter System ................4 Combination Meter ...................12 Speedometer ....................14 Tachometer ....................15 Fuel Gauge ....................16 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ............17 Warning Box .....................18...
Page 259 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 1. General Description A: CAUTION • Before disassembling or reassembling parts, al- ways disconnect the battery ground cable from bat- tery. When replacing the audio, control module and other parts provided with memory functions, record the memory contents before disconnecting the bat- tery ground cable.
Page 260 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Horn System COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 2. Horn System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. HORN <Ref. to WI-131, WIRING DIAGRAM, Horn Sys- tem.> B: INSPECTION 1. HORN RELAY Measure the security horn relay resistance be- tween terminals (indicated in the table below) when connecting terminal No.
Page 261 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Horn COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 3. Horn A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the left and right headlight assemblies. <Ref. to LI-12, REMOVAL, Headlight Assembly.> 3) Remove the horn bracket mounting bolt (A). 4) Disconnect the harness connector and remove the horn assembly (B).
Page 262 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Horn Switch COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 4. Horn Switch A: REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing, be sure to read the notes in the “AB” section for proper handling of the driver’s airbag module. <Ref. to AB-4, CAU- TION, General Description.> NOTE: Horn switch is a unit with the driver’s airbag mod- ule.
Page 263 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Horn Switch COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COM-6...
Page 264 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS Page General Description ...................2 Power Window System ................6 Power Window Control Switch ..............7 Front Door Glass ..................9 Front Regulator and Motor Assembly ............10 Remote Control Mirror System ..............11 Scalp Cap ....................12 Outer Mirror Assembly ................13 Outer Mirror ....................14 Remote Control Mirror Switch ..............15 Rear Door Glass ..................16...
Page 265 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 1. General Description A: COMPONENT CC-00369 Engine control module (ECM) Cruise indicator light and cruise Transmission control module set indicator light (TCM) Cruise control command switch Stop light & brake switch CC-2...
Page 266 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM B: CAUTION • Before disassembling or reassembling parts, al- ways disconnect the battery ground cable from bat- tery. When repairing the audio, control module, etc. which are provided with memory functions, record the memory contents before disconnecting the ground cable from battery.
Page 267 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Cruise Control Unit CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 2. Cruise Control Unit A: NOTE The control of cruise control system is carried out in Engine control module (ECM). B: REMOVAL <Ref. to FU(H6DO)-33, REMOVAL, Engine Control Module (ECM).> C: INSTALLATION <Ref.
Page 268 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Cruise Control Command Switch CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 3. Cruise Control Command B: INSTALLATION Switch Install in the reverse order of removal. C: INSPECTION A: REMOVAL Measure the cruise control command switch resis- CAUTION: tance. Before servicing, be sure to read the notes in the “AB”...
Page 269 CC(diag)-9, DIAG- diagnosis. <Ref. to CC(diag)-7, CRUISE CON- <Ref. to CC(diag)- NOSTIC PROCE- TROL CANCEL CONDITIONS DIAGNOSIS, 12, List of Diagnos- DURE WITH OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> tic Trouble Code PHENOMENON, (DTC).> Diagnostics with Phenomenon.> CHECK CRUISE SET INDICATOR LIGHT.
Page 270 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Basic Diagnostic Procedure CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK SET/COAST OPERATION. Does the vehicle speed Go to step 10. Go to phenome- Check the SET/COAST switch operation. decrease after SET/COAST non 6. <Ref. to switch has been pressed? CC(diag)-9, DIAG- NOSTIC PROCE- DURE WITH...
Page 271 Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the cruise control command switch. B: PREPARATION TOOL 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system. MONITOR KIT ST1B020XU0 2. GENERAL TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.
Page 272 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 3. Electrical Component Location A: LOCATION CC-00370 Engine control module (ECM) Cruise indicator light and cruise Transmission control module set indicator light (TCM) Cruise control command switch Stop and brake switch CC(diag)-5...
Page 273 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION To A: B134 To B: B135 To C: B136 To D: B137 17 16 12 11 17 16 12 11 12 11...
Page 274 2) Connect the diagnosis cable to Subaru Select 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Monitor. The on-board diagnosis function of the cruise con- 3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link trol system uses Subaru Select Monitor. connector. The on-board diagnosis function operates in two...
Page 275 • Place the shift lever in any position other than OFF. neutral. NOTE: • For details concerning operation procedure, re- fer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERA- TION MANUAL”. • Refer to “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)” for DTC. <Ref. to CC(diag)-12, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>...
Page 276 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics with Phenomenon CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 6. Diagnostics with Phenomenon A: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE WITH PHENOMENON Phenomenon Checking item Reference Cruise control main switch is (1) Check the cruise indicator <Ref. to CC(diag)-11, CHECK CRUISE INDICATOR not turned to ON.
Page 277 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics with Phenomenon CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Phenomenon Checking item Reference Vehicle speed does not Check the RESUME/ACCEL <Ref. to CC(diag)-15, DTC 11, Diagnostic Procedure with increase or does not return to switch. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).> set speed after RESUME/ <Ref.
Page 278 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics with Phenomenon CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) B: CHECK CRUISE INDICATOR LIGHT AND CRUISE SET INDICATOR LIGHT. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Cruise control can be set, but the cruise indicator light and cruise set indicator light do not illuminate. Step Check CHECK CRUISE INDICATOR LIGHT AND...
Page 279 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 7. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: LIST Item Contents of diagnosis Reference Main Switch Main switch of cruise control command switch is turned This DTC is displayed to OFF, and then the cruise control is released.
Page 280 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Item Contents of diagnosis Reference Brake Switch Input Circuit Malfunction of brake switch input circuit in ECM is <Ref. to CC(diag)-23, Malfunction detected. DTC 25, Diagnostic Pro- cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>...
Page 281 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Item Contents of diagnosis Reference Cruise Control Related Cruise control command switch malfunction is detected. <Ref. to CC(diag)-24, Switch Malfunction 1 (While the switch is pressed ON for a long time (approxi- DTC 65, Diagnostic Pro- mately two minutes), stuck ON open circuit is detected.) cedure with Diagnostic...
Page 282 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 8. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: DTC 11 TROUBLE SYMPTOM: • Cruise control cannot be set. (Cancelled immediately.) • Cruise control cannot be released. WIRING DIAGRAM: RESUME/ SET/...
Page 283 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK CRUISE CONTROL COMMAND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Go to step 2. Check the harness SWITCH CIRCUIT. between cruise 1) Remove the driver’s airbag module. <Ref. to control command AB-14, REMOVAL, Driver’s Airbag Module.>...
Page 284 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) B: DTC 12 TROUBLE SYMPTOM: • Cruise control cannot be set. • Cruise control cannot be released. WIRING DIAGRAM: BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF-2 F/B No.8 IGNITION RELAY SBF-8...
Page 285 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK STOP LIGHT SWITCH AND BRAKE Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. • Check fuse No. 8 SWITCH CIRCUIT. (in fuse &...
Page 286 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) C: DTC 14 TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Cruise control cannot be set. WIRING DIAGRAM: B136 C: B136 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18...
Page 287 CHECK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. Is Subaru Select Monitor ON Replace the ECM. Go to step 2. 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data when select lever is shifted into <Ref. to link connector. “P” or “N” range? Is Subaru...
Page 288 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) E: DTC 16 TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Cruise control cannot be set. WIRING DIAGRAM: IGNITION BATTERY SWITCH F/B No.12 MAIN SBF SBF-6 B135 B: B135 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 26 27...
Page 289 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check poor con- • Check fuse No. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tact of ECM con- 12 (in fuse &...
Page 290 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) H: DTC 24 Malfunction of the cruise control related switch. Refer to DTC 11 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to CC(diag)-15, DTC 11, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).> I: DTC 25 Malfunction of the brake input circuit in ECM.
Page 291 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) R: DTC 61 Malfunction of the brake light switch is detected. Refer to DTC 12 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to CC(diag)-17, DTC 12, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).> S: DTC 62 Neutral position switch malfunction is detected.
Page 292 Basic Diagnostic Procedure ...............2 General Description ...................3 Electrical Component Location ..............5 Immobilizer Control Module I/O Signal ............6 Subaru Select Monitor ................7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............8 Clear Memory Mode ...................9 Diagnostics Chart for Security Indicator Light ..........10 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............14...
Page 293 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Stop Light & Brake Switch CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 4. Stop Light & Brake Switch A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Disconnect the connector from the stop light & brake switch, and then remove the switch. <Ref. to BR-38, REMOVAL, Stop Light Switch.>...
Page 294 Basic Diagnostic Procedure ...............2 General Description ...................4 Electrical Component Location ..............5 Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ..........6 Subaru Select Monitor ................7 Diagnostics with Phenomenon ..............9 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............12 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....15...
Page 295 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description ENTERTAINMENT 1. General Description A: CAUTION • Before disassembling or reassembling parts, al- ways disconnect the battery ground cable from bat- tery. • When replacing the audio, control module and other parts provided with memory functions, record the memory contents before disconnecting the bat- tery ground cable.
Page 296 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Audio System ENTERTAINMENT 2. Audio System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-115, WIRING DIAGRAM, Audio System.> B: INSPECTION Symptom Repair order No power coming in. (No display and no sound from speakers) 1. Check the fuse and power supply for audio. 2.
Page 297 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Accessory Power Supply Socket System ENTERTAINMENT 3. Front Accessory Power Sup- ply Socket System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-129, WIRING DIAGRAM, Front Acces- sory Power Supply Socket System.> ET-4...
Page 298 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Accessory Power Supply Socket System ENTERTAINMENT 4. Rear Accessory Power Supply Socket System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-130, WIRING DIAGRAM, Rear Acces- sory Power Supply Socket System.> ET-5...
Page 299 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Navigation System ENTERTAINMENT 5. Navigation System 5. CHECK THE GPS ANTENNA NOTE: A: WIRING DIAGRAM When checking the GPS antenna, perform the <Ref. to WI-119, WIRING DIAGRAM, Navigation check operation outdoors to improve the receiver System.> sensitivity.
Page 300 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rearview Camera System ENTERTAINMENT 6. Rearview Camera System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-123, WIRING DIAGRAM, Rearview Camera System.> B: INSPECTION Symptom Repair order The screen of rear view camera is not displayed. (The naviga- 1. Check the back sensor for each connection: Make sure that tion screen is displayed normally.) the back sensor is ON.
Page 301 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Multi-function Display (MFD) System ENTERTAINMENT 7. Multi-function Display (MFD) System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-124, WIRING DIAGRAM, Multi-function Display (MFD) System.> B: INSPECTION Symptom Repair order No power coming in. (Light does not illuminate.) 1. Check the fuse and power supply for the display. 2.
Page 302 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Entertainment System ENTERTAINMENT 8. Rear Entertainment System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-126, WIRING DIAGRAM, Rear Entertainment System.> B: INSPECTION 1. CHECK THE DVD-ROM. Insert a region code 1 DVD-ROM, and check that the images from the DVD are displayed when playing back the media.
Page 303 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Panel ENTERTAINMENT 9. Control Panel A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the ring indicator (A) and console front panel (B). :(B) EI-01572 3) Remove the instrument ornament on passen- ger’s seat and inner panels on driver’s seat.
Page 304 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Panel ENTERTAINMENT C: INSPECTION ET-00218 SEEK UP switch SCAN switch (13) RSE AUX switch SEEK DOWN switch PUSH/POWER switch (14) SAT switch TUNE TRACK UP switch VOLUME (15) TONE/BAL switch TUNE TRACK DOWN switch (10) Presets 1 —...
Page 305 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Panel ENTERTAINMENT 1. SELF DIAGNOSIS OF THE CONTROL PANEL AND AUDIO Step Check SETTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE BY Does the self diagnosis mode Go to step 3. Go to step 2. OPERATING THE CONTROL PANEL. of the control panel operate? 1) Turn the audio system OFF with the ignition switch on ACC or ON.
Page 306 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Panel ENTERTAINMENT 2. SWITCH CHECK LIST TEMP display TEMP display TEMP display TEMP display Switch Switch TUNE/TRACK TONE/BAL — TUNE/TRACK 1 (Preset) — SEEK/FLDR 2 (Preset) — SEEK/FLDR 3 (Preset) — SCAN — 4 (Preset) —...
Page 307 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Audio ENTERTAINMENT 10.Audio 6) Remove the screws, and partially pull the audio out from center console. A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the ring indicator (A) and console front panel (B). ET-00173 7) Disconnect the harness connector and antenna feeder cord, and then remove the audio.
Page 308 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Speaker ENTERTAINMENT 11.Front Speaker A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the front door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.> 3) Remove the front speaker mounting screws. ET-00175 4) Disconnect the harness connector and remove the front speaker.
Page 309 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Tweeter ENTERTAINMENT 12.Tweeter B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL 1. FRONT 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the front door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.> 3) Remove the side deflector duct.
Page 310 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Speaker ENTERTAINMENT 13.Rear Speaker A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.> 3) Remove the rear speaker mounting screws. ET-00178 4) Disconnect the harness connector and remove the rear speaker.
Page 311 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Woofer ENTERTAINMENT 14.Woofer A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the quarter trim. <Ref. to EI-45, RE- MOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.> 3) Remove the woofer bracket mounting screws. ET-00179 4) Disconnect the harness connector and detach the woofers.
Page 312 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Antenna ENTERTAINMENT 15.Antenna B: REPAIR 1) Clean the antenna wire and surrounding area A: INSPECTION with a cloth dampened by alcohol. Measure the resistance between the antenna ter- 2) Paste a thin masking film on the glass along bro- minal and each antenna wire.
Page 313 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Antenna Amplifier ENTERTAINMENT 16.Antenna Amplifier A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear gate trim. <Ref. to EI-51, RE- MOVAL, Rear Gate Trim.> 3) Disconnect the harness connectors and termi- nals.
Page 314 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Noise Suppressor ENTERTAINMENT 17.Noise Suppressor A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear gate trim. <Ref. to EI-51, RE- MOVAL, Rear Gate Trim.> 3) Disconnect harness connector from noise sup- pressor.
Page 315 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Navigation Display ENTERTAINMENT 18.Navigation Display A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the upper grille. <Ref. to AC-49, UP- PER GRILL, REMOVAL, Air Vent Grille.> 3) Remove the warning box. ET-00183 4) Remove the screws and then remove the navi- gation display.
Page 316 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Navigation Body ENTERTAINMENT 19.Navigation Body A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Slide the driver’s seat to the forward position. 3) Remove the cover attachment bolts, and remove the cover. ET-00195 4) Disconnect the connector. 5) Remove the bolts and then remove the naviga- tion unit.
Page 317 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Navigation Switch ENTERTAINMENT 20.Navigation Switch A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the control panel. <Ref. to ET-10, RE- MOVAL, Control Panel.> 3) Remove the screws and then remove the navi- gation switch.
Page 318 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 GPS Antenna ENTERTAINMENT 21.GPS Antenna A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to IDI-12, REMOVAL, Combination Meter.> 3) Remove the audio. <Ref. to ET-14, REMOVAL, Audio.> 4) Remove the navigation display. <Ref. to ET-22, REMOVAL, Navigation Display.>...
Page 319 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rearview Camera ENTERTAINMENT 22.Rearview Camera A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear gate trim and disconnect the rear view camera connector and the ground cable. <Ref. to EI-51, REMOVAL, Rear Gate Trim.> ET-00232 3) Detach the license light assembly.
Page 320 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rearview Camera Control Unit ENTERTAINMENT 23.Rearview Camera Control Unit A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the left rear quarter lower trim. <Ref. to EI-45, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.> 3) Remove the nut, disconnect the connector and remove the control unit.
Page 321 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Multi-function Display (MFD) ENTERTAINMENT 24.Multi-function Display (MFD) A: REMOVAL <Ref. to ET-22, REMOVAL, Navigation Display.> B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. ET-28...
Page 322 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Multi-function Switch ENTERTAINMENT 25.Multi-function Switch A: REMOVAL <Ref. to ET-24, REMOVAL, Navigation Switch.> B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. ET-29...
Page 323 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Entertainment ENTERTAINMENT 26.Rear Entertainment 5) Remove the temporary screws and remove the monitor body. A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Insert a flat tip screw driver in the section, and remove the room light lens.
Page 324 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 AUX Input Terminal ENTERTAINMENT 27.AUX Input Terminal A: REMOVAL 1. REAR ENTERTAINMENT INPUT TERMI- 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the left rear quarter trim lower. <Ref. to EI-45, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.> 3) Remove the AUX input terminal from the rear quarter trim.
Page 325 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Accessory Power Supply Socket ENTERTAINMENT 28.Front Accessory Power Supply Socket A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the console box. <Ref. to EI-38, RE- MOVAL, Console Box.> 3) Disconnect the harness connector, and remove the accessory power supply socket.
Page 326 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Accessory Power Supply Socket ENTERTAINMENT 29.Rear Accessory Power Supply Socket A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the left rear quarter lower trim. <Ref. to EI-45, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.> 3) Disconnect the harness connector, and remove the accessory power supply socket.
Page 327 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Steering Satellite Switch ENTERTAINMENT 30.Steering Satellite Switch A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Set the tire to the straight-ahead position. 3) Remove the airbag module. <Ref. to AB-14, RE- MOVAL, Driver’s Airbag Module.> WARNING: If there are airbag modules mounted, always re- fer to “Airbag System”...
Page 328 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Steering Satellite Switch ENTERTAINMENT Step Check Is the resistance approx. 22 Ω? Go to step 2. CHECK MUTE SWITCH CONTINUITY. Replace the satel- 1) Press the mute switch. lite switch. 2) Measure the resistance between satellite switch connector terminals.
Page 329 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Steering Satellite Switch ENTERTAINMENT ET-36...
Page 330 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Page General Description ...................2 Horn System ....................3 Horn ......................4 Horn Switch ....................5...
Page 331 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 1. General Description A: SPECIFICATION 1. FRONT EB-00271 Front bumper Headlight Front pillar Front hood panel Front fender panel Section Part Specification Front hood panel to Front bumper 5.0±1.0 mm (0.20±0.04 in) Front hood panel to Headlight 3.5±1.0 mm (0.14±0.04 in) Headlight to Front bumper...
Page 332 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 2. SIDE EB-00318 EB-3...
Page 333 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS (11) (10) EB-00276 Front quarter glass Rear quarter panel Roof panel Front fender panel Door garnish (10) Rear quarter garnish Front door panel Side sill garnish (11) Rear quarter glass Rear door panel Door sash Section Part...
Page 334 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 3. REAR (10) EB-00272 EB-5...
Page 335 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS (10) EB-00319 Rear gate panel Rear gate glass Fuel filler flap lid Rear bumper Rear gate garnish Roof spoiler Rear combination light Rear quarter panel (10) Rear finisher light Roof panel Section Part Specification...
Page 336 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS B: COMPONENT 1. FRONT HOOD EB-00273 Front hood panel Front hood release handle ASSY Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Front hood insulator Front grille weatherstrip T1: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5) Front hood hinge T2: 20 (2.04, 14.5) Front hood damper T3: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
Page 337 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 2. FRONT FENDER PANEL EB-00274 Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) T: 7.4 (0.75, 5.5) EB-8...
Page 338 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 3. FRONT DOOR PANEL EB-00289 Front door panel Lower hinge Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Sealing cover T1: 7.4 (0.75, 5.5) T2: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1) Front door weather strip T3: 29.4 (3.0, 21.7) Checker T4: 32.3 (3.3, 23.8) Upper hinge...
Page 339 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 4. REAR DOOR PANEL EB-00290 Rear door panel Lower hinge Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Sealing cover T1: 7.4 (0.75, 5.5) T2: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1) Rear door weather strip T3: 29.4 (3.0, 21.7) Checker T4: 32.3 (3.3, 23.8) Upper hinge...
Page 340 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 5. REAR GATE PANEL EB-00277 Rear gate damper stay Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Hinge T1: 16 (1.63, 11.5) T2: 20 (2.04, 14.5) Rear gate panel T3: 25 (2.6, 18.4) EB-11...
Page 341 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR BODY PANELS C: CAUTION • Exterior body panels are heavy. Do not drop and damage the panels. During removal and installation, do not damage the panel painting surface. • While removing mounting bolts, using assistance devices such as a support jack will help support the pan- •...
Page 342 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Hood EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 2. Front Hood 3. FRONT HOOD DAMPER 1) Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the A: REMOVAL damper stay. 1. FRONT HOOD INSULATOR 1) Release the clips to remove the front hood insu- lator.
Page 343 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Hood EXTERIOR BODY PANELS B: INSTALLATION 4) Remove the front fender. <Ref. to EB-15, RE- MOVAL, Front Fender.> Install in the reverse order of removal. 5) Remove the bolts of front hood hinge. NOTE: Be careful not to catch the window washer hose in. Tightening torque: Refer to “COMPONENT”...
Page 344 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Fender EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 3. Front Fender A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the side sill garnish. <Ref. to EI-32, RE- MOVAL, Side Garnish.> 3) Remove the front bumper. <Ref. to EI-21, RE- MOVAL, Front Bumper.>...
Page 345 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Door EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 4. Front Door 13) Remove the instrument panel lower cover or glove box lower cover. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, A: REMOVAL Instrument Panel Lower Cover.> or <Ref. to EI-37, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
Page 346 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Door EXTERIOR BODY PANELS B: INSTALLATION C: ADJUSTMENT 1) Put a wooden block on jack and place the front 1) Using the ST, loosen the body-side bolts of up- door on that. per and lower hinges to align the position for verti- cal and horizontal direction of the front door panel.
Page 347 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Sealing Cover EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 5. Front Sealing Cover A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the front door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.> 3) Remove the door trim bracket. EB-00034 4) Remove the sealing cover.
Page 348 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Door EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 6. Rear Door 12) Pull the door harness connector inside the cen- ter pillar, then disconnect the connector. A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.>...
Page 349 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Door EXTERIOR BODY PANELS B: INSTALLATION C: ADJUSTMENT 1) Put a wooden block on jack and place the rear 1) Open the rear door, loosen the door-side bolts of door on that. upper and lower hinges to align the position for ver- tical and horizontal direction of rear door panel.
Page 350 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Sealing Cover EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 7. Rear Sealing Cover A: REMOVAL Refer to the front sealing cover. <Ref. to EB-18, REMOVAL, Front Sealing Cover.> B: INSTALLATION Refer to the front sealing cover. <Ref. to EB-18, IN- STALLATION, Front Sealing Cover.>...
Page 351 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 8. Rear Gate 11) Remove the rubber duct (A) connection, and pull out the harness and washer hose from the rear A: REMOVAL gate. 1. REAR GATE PANEL 1) Remove the weather strip clip, and remove the rear gate panel weather strip.
Page 352 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate EXTERIOR BODY PANELS 14) Remove the rear gate hinge bolt, and remove 3) Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the the rear gate panel. damper stay. EB-00023 EB-00283 15) Remove the rear gate hinge from the vehicle. 2.
Page 353 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate EXTERIOR BODY PANELS B: INSTALLATION C: DISPOSAL 1. REAR GATE PANEL 1. REAR GATE DAMPER STAY 1) Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: 2) Install with attention to make uniform clearance Gas is colorless, odorless, and harmless. How- between rear gate panel and body.
Page 354 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Page General Description ...................2 Cruise Control Unit ..................4 Cruise Control Command Switch ...............5 Stop Light & Brake Switch ................6...
Page 355 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 1. General Description A: COMPONENT 1. UNDER COVER EI-01248 Front lower cover Under cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) T1: 7.5 (0.76, 5.4) T2: 17.5 (1.78, 12.7) EI-2...
Page 356 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 2. UNDER PROTECTOR EI-01566 Fuel tank protector RH Fuel tank protector LH Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) T: 9.0 (0.92, 6.6) T: 17.5 (1.78, 12.9) EI-3...
Page 357 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 3. FRONT BUMPER EI-01530 Bumper face Bumper beam reinforcement Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Front upper cover Towing hook cover T1: 7.5 (0.76, 5.4) T2: 33 (3.4, 24) Energy absorber foam Front grille EI-4...
Page 358 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 4. REAR BUMPER EI-01531 Bumper face Bumper beam reinforcement Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Energy absorber foam T1: 7.5 (0.76, 5.4) T2: 33 (3.4, 24) 5. MUD GUARD EI-01532 Front mud guard Rear mud guard LH Rear mud guard RH EI-5...
Page 359 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 6. COWL PANEL EI-01253 Weather strip Cowl panel LH Cowl panel side Cowl panel RH 7. ROOF SPOILER EI-01254 Roof spoiler Washer nozzle Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) High-mounted stop light T: 4.5 (0.46, 3.32) EI-6...
Page 360 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 8. ROOF MOLDING EI-01255 Roof molding Clip Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Roof carrier attachment Rivet T: 10 (1.0, 7.23) EI-7...
Page 361 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 9. SIDE GARNISH EI-01256 Front fender garnish Rear door garnish Rear quarter garnish Front door garnish Side sill garnish Garnish end cover EI-8...
Page 362 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 10.DOOR TRIM (10) EI-01533 Front door trim Weather strip Power window main switch ASSY Gusset cover Power window switch cover (10) Rear door trim Defroster duct Door lock switch Tweeter Power window sub-switch EI-9...
Page 363 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 11.CONSOLE BOX (10) (11) (12) EI-01537 Console upper lid Console pocket (11) Rear panel cover Lid hinge Console frame (12) Console lower pocket Console lower lid Console rear panel Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Console front panel (10) Rear panel cover (with rear...
Page 364 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 12.INSTRUMENT PANEL (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (11) (10) (12) (16) (12) (13) (15) EI-01538 Air vent upper grille Air vent side grille (13) Center console frame Display cover Meter stay (14) Air vent duct Combination meter ASSY...
Page 365 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM (15) (16) (13) (14) (10) (11) (12) EI-01539 Garnish LH Console side panel lower LH (13) Instrument panel side cover Switch ASSY Garnish CTR (14) Glove box panel Instrument panel lower cover Console side panel upper RH (15) Steering support beam ASSY...
Page 366 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 13.SIDE TRIM (10) EI-01540 Front pillar upper trim Center pillar lower trim (10) Rear quarter lower trim Center pillar upper trim Rear scuff plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Front pillar lower trim Rear door scuff plate T: 7.5 (0.76, 5.4) Front scuff plate...
Page 367 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 14.REAR GATE TRIM EI-01541 Rear gate panel upper trim Luggage floor end cover Rear gate panel lower trim Rear gate panel pillar trim Luggage floor mat EI-14...
Page 368 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 15.ROOF TRIM EI-01260 Roof trim Sun visor Assist rail 16.HEAT SHIELD COVER EI-01261 Front heat shield cover Rear heat shield cover RH Rear heat shield cover LH Center heat shield cover EI-15...
Page 369 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 17.TRAILER HITCH AC-01382 Main frame Side frame Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Center frame Cover T1: 13 (1.33, 9.4) T2: 33 (3.37, 23.9) T3: 53 (5.4 38.3) B: PREPARATION TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Clip remover Used for removing trim.
Page 370 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Under Cover EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 2. Front Under Cover A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the un- dercover. EI-01263 2) Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the front lower cover. EI-01264 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 371 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Fuel Tank Protector EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 3. Fuel Tank Protector A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (B), and then re- move the fuel tank protector. EI-01265 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: Bolt 17.5 N·m (1.78 kgf-m, 12.9 ft-lb)
Page 372 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Mud Guard EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 4. Mud Guard A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the wheels. 2) Loosen the screws and clips to remove mud guard. • Front mud guard EI-01266 • Rear mud guard EI-01267 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EI-19...
Page 373 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Grille EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 5. Front Grille A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the front bumper. <Ref. to EI-21, RE- MOVAL, Front Bumper.> 2) Remove the screws, and remove the front grille from bumper face. EI-01262 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 374 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 6. Front Bumper 5) Remove the notch on the bumper face side from guide bracket (A) A: REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not pull forcefully. It can damage the notch 1. FRONT BUMPER FACE on the bumper face side.
Page 375 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 2. FRONT BUMPER BEAM ASSEMBLY B: INSTALLATION 1) Remove the front bumper face. 1. FRONT BUMPER FACE 2) Remove the energy absorber foam from bumper 1) Mount the bumper face securely in the gap be- beam.
Page 376 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM C: REPAIR 1. COATING METHOD FOR PP BUMPER Process Process name Job contents Place the bumper on a paint worktable as Bumper installation required. Use the paint worktable conforming to inner shape of bumper if possible. EI-00234 (1) Bumper (2) Set bumper section...
Page 377 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 2. REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS FOR COLORED PP BUMPER NOTE: All PP bumpers are provided with a grained surface, and if the surface is damaged, it cannot normally be re- stored to its former condition. Damages limited to the shallow scratches that cause only a change in the luster of the base material or coating, can be almost fully restored.
Page 378 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 3) Deep damage such as a break or hole that requires filling Much of the peripheral grained surface must be sacrificed for repair. The degree of restoration is not really worth the expense. (The surface, however, will become almost flush with adjacent areas.) Recommended repair kit: PP Part Repair Kit (NRM) Process Process name...
Page 379 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM Process Process name Job contents Using a heater gun and PP welding rod, weld the beveled spot while melting both the rod and damaged area. Welding EI-00237 (1) Welding rod (2) Melt hatched area (3) Section NOTE: •...
Page 380 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM Process Process name Job contents Sanding (III) Sand the coated surface and its surrounding areas using #400 sand paper and water. Cleaning/ Same as Process No. 12. degreasing Non-colored Metallic paint Use a “block” coating method. Use a “block”...
Page 381 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 7. Rear Bumper 4) Remove the rear bumper from vehicle body. A: REMOVAL 1. REAR BUMPER FACE 1) Remove the clips, and then remove the reflector. EI-01275 CAUTION: Do not pull with a excessive force. Otherwise the bracket installation area may be damaged.
Page 382 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Bumper EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 3. REAR BUMPER BEAM ASSEMBLY 1) Remove the rear bumper face. 2) Remove the energy absorber foam. 3) Remove the nuts, and remove the bumper beam assembly from vehicle body. EI-01278 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 383 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Cowl Panel EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 8. Cowl Panel 4) Pull and remove the cowl panel RH. A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the wiper arm. <Ref. to WW-15, RE- MOVAL, Front Wiper Arm.> 2) Remove the weather strip clips, and remove the weather strip.
Page 384 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Roof Spoiler EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 9. Roof Spoiler A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear gate upper trim. <Ref. to EI-51, REMOVAL, Rear Gate Trim.> 2) Disconnect the connector of high-mounted stop light and the washer hose of rear washer. 3) Remove the nuts.
Page 385 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Garnish EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 10.Side Garnish A: REMOVAL EI-01256 Front fender garnish Rear door garnish Rear quarter garnish Front door garnish Side sill garnish Garnish end cover 1) Remove the clip on the bottom side of the vehi- NOTE: cle body, and the clip that is attached with the front •...
Page 386 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Garnish EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM B: INSTALLATION (3) Apply masking tape around the double-sid- ed tape remaining on the surface of body or 1) Apply primer to the door garnish surface where spoiler. the double-sided tape is to be adhered, and then (4) Apply solvent uniformly on the double-sided adhere the double-sided tape as shown in the fig- tape using a brush.
Page 387 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Roof Molding EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 11.Roof Molding 4) Remove the nuts, and remove the roof carrier at- tachment. A: REMOVAL 1) Turn over the edge of the roof molding, and re- move the inside clips with flat tip screwdriver by sliding as arrow indicates.
Page 388 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Door Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 12.Door Trim 5) Remove the gusset cover. • Front door A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the cover (A) at inner remote. EI-01376 • Rear door EI-01285 3) Remove the bottom cover at the pull handle.
Page 389 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Instrument Panel Lower Cover EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 13.Instrument Panel Lower Cov- 5) Remove the clips and hooks, disconnect the connectors, and then remove the instrument panel lower cover upper. A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the front door scuff plate and front pillar lower trim.
Page 390 asieps_tobira.book 37 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Glove Box EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 14.Glove Box 5) Remove the screws (A) and hooks (B), and dis- connect the connector, and then remove the glove A: REMOVAL box assembly. 1) Remove the front door scuff plate and front pillar lower trim.
Page 391 asieps_tobira.book 38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Console Box EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 15.Console Box A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the ring indicator (A) and console front panel (B). :(B) EI-01299 NOTE: The ring indicator can be easily removed by insert- ing the clip remover or equivalent into the positions indicated by arrows.
Page 392 asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Center Console EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 16.Center Console A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the control panel. <Ref. to AC-32, RE- MOVAL, Control Panel.> 2) Remove the instrument panel lower cover. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, Instrument Panel Lower Cov- er.> 3) Remove the glove box.
Page 393 asieps_tobira.book 40 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Instrument Panel Assembly EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 17.Instrument Panel Assembly 11) Remove the mounting bolts of the passenger’s side airbag module. A: REMOVAL CAUTION: Take care of the following when removing the instrument panel from the vehicle body. •...
Page 394 asieps_tobira.book 41 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Instrument Panel Assembly EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 3. INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 13) Make sure that the instrument panel upper is removed from the steering support beam 1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery and 14) Disconnect the connectors, and remove the in- wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work.
Page 395 asieps_tobira.book 42 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Instrument Panel Assembly EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM B: INSTALLATION 3. INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 1) Insert the matching pins (three places) on the in- 1. INSTRUMENT PANEL UPPER strument panel tip into the grommet (A) and (B) on 1) Insert the matching pins (three places) on the in- the body panel side.
Page 396 asieps_tobira.book 43 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 18.Side Trim 3. FRONT PILLAR LOWER TRIM 1) Front door scuff plate A: REMOVAL 2) Remove the clip, and remove the front pillar trim. 1. FRONT PILLAR UPPER TRIM 1) Remove the cap (A) on the upper side of pillar trim, and remove the bolt inside.
Page 397 asieps_tobira.book 44 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 5. CENTER PILLAR LOWER TRIM 8) Remove the clip, and remove the center pillar upper trim. 1) Remove the front door scuff plate. 2) Remove the rear door scuff plate. 3) Remove the clip, and remove the center pillar lower trim.
Page 398 asieps_tobira.book 45 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Quarter Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 19.Rear Quarter Trim 8) Remove the rear quarter top trim. A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the third-row seats. <Ref. to SE-18, REMOVAL, Third-Row Seats.> 2) Remove the rear door scuff plate. <Ref. to EI-43, REAR DOOR SCUFF PLATE, REMOVAL, Side Trim.>...
Page 399 asieps_tobira.book 46 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Quarter Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 12) Remove the cover (A), and remove the bolts in- side. EI-01534 13) Remove the cap (A) on the upper side of pillar trim, and remove the bolt inside. 14) Disconnect each connector, and remove the rear quarter upper trim.
Page 400 asieps_tobira.book 47 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Floor Mat EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 20.Floor Mat 2. REAR FLOOR MAT 1) Remove the second row seats. <Ref. to SE-13, A: REMOVAL REMOVAL, Second-Row Seats.> 2) Remove the third-row seats. (7 seater mod- 1. FRONT FLOOR MAT el)<Ref.
Page 401 asieps_tobira.book 48 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sun Visor EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 21.Sun Visor A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the cover, loosen the mounting screws, and remove the sun visor. EI-00661 2) Disconnect the connector. (Model with vanity mirror light) 3) While pressing the (A) on the both side using flat tip screwdriver, pull the sun visor hook to remove it.
Page 402 asieps_tobira.book 49 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Assist Grip EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 22.Assist Grip A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the screw cover, and remove the screw inside. 2) Pull the left side of assist grip, and rotate the right side of it counterclockwise to remove. EI-00809 3) Remove the roof trim.
Page 403 asieps_tobira.book 50 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Roof Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 23.Roof Trim A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the spot map light. <Ref. to LI-30, RE- MOVAL, Spot Map Light.> 3) Remove the room light or rear entertainment (model with rear entertainment system).
Page 404 asieps_tobira.book 51 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Trim EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 24.Rear Gate Trim B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the claws (A), and remove the rear gate pillar trim. :(A) EI-00670 2) Remove the clips and claws (A), and remove the rear gate upper trim.
Page 405 asieps_tobira.book 52 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Garnish EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 25.Rear Gate Garnish A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the hexagon cap nut (A). EI-01355 2) Remove the rear gate garnish. EI-01356 (A) Hexagon cap nut (B) Double-sided tape B: INSTALLATION Use new double-sided tapes, and install in the re- verse order of removal.
Page 406 asieps_tobira.book 53 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Heat Shield Cover EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 26.Heat Shield Cover 3. REAR HEAT SHIELD COVER 1) Remove the muffler. <Ref. to EX(H6DO)-6, RE- A: REMOVAL MOVAL, Rear Exhaust Pipe.> 2) Remove the rear heat shield cover. 1. FRONT HEAT SHIELD COVER 1) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
Page 407 asieps_tobira.book 54 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Trailer Hitch EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM 27.Trailer Hitch A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the spare tire hoist. <Ref. to WT-14, REMOVAL, Spare Tire Hoist.> 2) Remove the bolt, and then detach the main frame. EI-01383 CAUTION: The trailer hitch main frame is heavy. Be careful when removing.
Page 408 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 EXTERIOR BODY PANELS Page General Description ...................2 Front Hood ....................13 Front Fender ....................15 Front Door ....................16 Front Sealing Cover .................18 Rear Door ....................19 Rear Sealing Cover ..................21 Rear Gate ....................22...
Page 409 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 1. General Description A: COMPONENT 1. FIXED GLASS (10) (10) (12) (10) (10) (11) (10) (13) GW-00562 Windshield glass Spacer (10) Fastener Dam rubber Fastener (11) Rear quarter glass Molding front Seal (12) Rear gate glass Rearview mirror mount Front quarter glass...
Page 410 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 2. FRONT DOOR GLASS GW-00563 Glass Regulator ASSY Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Door sash Motor ASSY T: 7.4 (0.75, 5.5) Glass run rubber Weather strip GW-3...
Page 411 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 3. REAR DOOR GLASS GW-00564 Glass Regulator ASSY Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Door sash Motor ASSY T1: 4.4 (0.45, 3.3) T2: 7.4 (0.75, 5.5) Glass run rubber Weather strip GW-4...
Page 412 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. MIRROR GW-00476 Outer mirror Side turn signal light Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Mirror Rearview mirror T: 2 (0.2, 1.5) Scalp cap Mount B: CAUTION • When electrical connectors are disconnected, always conduct an operational check after connecting them again.
Page 413 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Window System GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 2. Power Window System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-132, Power Window System.> B: INSPECTION Symptom Repair order 1. Fuse (SBF-4) 2. Power window circuit breaker All power windows do not operate. 3.
Page 414 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Window Control Switch GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 3. Power Window Control C: INSPECTION Switch 1. MAIN SWITCH Measure the switch resistance. A: REMOVAL 1. MAIN SWITCH 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Peel the cover inside the hand grip, and remove the screw.
Page 415 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Window Control Switch GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS • Make sure that the window lock switch is measured in the UNLOCK position. Switch position Terminal No. Standard Less than 1 Ω 13 and 2, 5 and 1 Less than 1 Ω 2 and 5, 1 and 5 Driver’s seat DOWN...
Page 416 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Door Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 4. Front Door Glass B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL CAUTION: 1) Remove the front door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Make sure that the glass run rubber is placed MOVAL, Door Trim.>...
Page 417 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Regulator and Motor Assembly GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 5. Front Regulator and Motor Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the door glass. <Ref. to GW-9, RE- MOVAL, Front Door Glass.> 2) Disconnect the motor connector. 3) Remove the four bolts and two nuts to remove regulator assembly.
Page 418 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Remote Control Mirror System GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 6. Remote Control Mirror System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-137, Remote Control Mirror System.> B: INSPECTION Symptom Repair order 1. Fuse (F/B No. 6) All function does not operate. 2. Mirror switch 3.
Page 419 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Scalp Cap GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 7. Scalp Cap A: REPLACEMENT 1) Remove the mirror. <Ref. to GW-14, REPLACE- MENT, Outer Mirror.> 2) Press in the upper side clips (A) from inside of the outer mirror. GW-00312 3) Pull the scalp cap frontward of outer mirror, re- move the upper side clips (A) and lower side hooks (B), and then remove the scalp cap.
Page 420 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Outer Mirror Assembly GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 8. Outer Mirror Assembly C: INSPECTION Check that the rearview mirror moves properly A: REMOVAL when the battery voltage is applied to terminals. 1) Remove the mirror gusset cover. GW-00485 GW-00484 Mirror movement Terminal No.
Page 421 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Outer Mirror GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 9. Outer Mirror A: REPLACEMENT 1) Face the mirror upward. 2) Use a flat tip screwdriver to remove clip (A). 3) Lift the lower mirror up to remove hooks (B). GW-00279 4) Disconnect the mirror heater connector from side of the mirror.
Page 422 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Remote Control Mirror Switch GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 10.Remote Control Mirror C: INSPECTION Switch 1. REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR SWITCH Move the remote control mirror switch to each po- A: REMOVAL sition and check continuity between terminals. 1) Remove the instrument panel lower cover. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, Instrument Panel Lower Cov- er.>...
Page 423 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Door Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 11.Rear Door Glass 6) Move the sash (C) upward, and move the nut (B) to the position on rear door as shown in the figure. A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.>...
Page 424 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Regulator and Motor Assembly GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 12.Rear Regulator and Motor Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear door glass. <Ref. to GW-16, REMOVAL, Rear Door Glass.> 2) Disconnect the motor connector. 3) Remove the four bolts and two nuts to remove regulator assembly.
Page 425 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Windshield Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 13.Windshield Glass • The locating pins are bonded to the corners of glass. Use piano wire to disconnect the pins. A: REMOVAL 1. USING THE WINDSHIELD GLASS KNIFE 1) Remove the cowl panel. <Ref. to EI-30, RE- MOVAL, Cowl Panel.>...
Page 426 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Windshield Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS B: INSTALLATION (2) Install the molding from upper corners to- wards center. 1) Clean the external circumference of windshield (3) Install the molding from upper corners glass with alcohol or white gasoline. downward. 2) Remove the adhesive layer on the body using (4) Apply the double-sided tape (B) uniformly cutter knife to obtain smooth face of 2 mm (0.08 in)
Page 427 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Windshield Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS • Do not touch the surface coated with primer. 9) Cut off the cartridge nozzle tip as shown and set it in sealant gun. GW-00561 GW-00494 (1) Application of primer (1) 10 mm (0.39 in) (2) Glass side (2) 9 mm (0.35 in) (3) Body side...
Page 428 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Windshield Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 11) Fit the locating pins, and install windshield glass using suction rubber cup. GW-00045 12) Lightly press the windshield glass for tight fit. 13) Make flush the adhesive surface jutted out us- ing spatula. 14) After completion of all work, allow the vehicle to stand for about 24 hours.
Page 429 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Quarter Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 14.Front Quarter Glass B: INSTALLATION 1) Cut out the nozzle head and apply adhesive to A: REMOVAL the glass end surface as shown. Remove the front quarter glass in the same proce- dure as for windshield glass.
Page 430 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 15.Rear Gate Glass A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear wiper motor. <Ref. to WW-19, REMOVAL, Rear Wiper Motor.> 2) Disconnect the electrical connectors from rear defogger terminal. 3) Remove the glass in the same procedure as for windshield glass.
Page 431 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 6) About one hour after installation, conduct a leak test. GW-00499 Glass Adhesive Spacer Glass clip pin Dam rubber Marks for applying the primer Fastener 7) After completion of all work, allow the vehicle to stand for about 24 hours.
Page 432 4. Rear defogger condenser 5. Defogger wire 6. Wiring harness 7. Body integrated unit NOTE: Rear window defogger system can be customized on the Subaru Select Monitor. System name Initial setting Customize setting Repeat 15 min. Rear window OFF after 15 min.
Page 433 REMOVAL, Body Select Monitor. utes stop? Integrated Unit.> 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from the «main menu». 4) Select the {Current Data Display & Save}.
Page 434 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Window Defogger GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS B: REPAIR 1) Clean the broken portion with alcohol or white gasoline. 2) Mask both side of wire with thin film. 3) Apply the conductive silver composition (DU- PONT No. 4817) to the broken portion. GW-00078 (1) Broken portion (2) Thin film...
Page 435 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Quarter Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 18.Rear Quarter Glass B: INSTALLATION 1) Install the dam rubber. A: REMOVAL 2) Cut out the nozzle head and apply adhesive to Remove the glass in the same procedure as for the glass end surface as shown. windshield glass.
Page 436 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunroof Glass GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 19.Sunroof Glass A: REMOVAL <Ref. to SR-5, REMOVAL, Glass Lid.> B: INSTALLATION <Ref. to SR-5, INSTALLATION, Glass Lid.> C: ADJUSTMENT <Ref. to SR-5, ADJUSTMENT, Glass Lid.> GW-29...
Page 437 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rearview Mirror GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS 20.Rearview Mirror A: REMOVAL ® 1) Remove the TORX screw (1). 2) Slide the rearview mirror (2) to the upper side (A) of windshield glass (3), and remove the mirror from mount (4). GW-00413 CAUTION: •...
Page 438 Refer to “Rear Window Defogger” for inspection. <Ref. to GW-26, INSPECTION, Rear Window De- fogger.> NOTE: Wiper deicer system can be customized on the Subaru Select Monitor. System name Initial setting Customize setting Continuous oper- Wiper deicer timer OFF after 15 min.
Page 439 <Ref. to SL-51, switch is operated using Subaru Select Monitor. continuously? REMOVAL, Body 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data Integrated Unit.> link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from the «main menu».
Page 440 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 BODY STRUCTURE Page General Description ...................2 Datum Dimensions ..................3 Body Sealing ....................23 Anticorrosion Wax ..................31 Under Coat ....................39 Galvanized Sheet Metal ................43 Aluminium Sheet Metal ................44...
Page 441 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Basic Diagnostic Procedure HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure A: PROCEDURE Step Check START INSPECTIONS. Does the self-diagnosis oper- Go to step 2. <Ref. to AC(diag)- 1) Perform the pre-inspection. <Ref. to ate? 15, A/C OR SELF- AC(diag)-3, INSPECTION, General Descrip- DIAGNOSIS SYS-...
Page 442 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. General Description 2. ASPIRATOR HOSE 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and press the A/ A: CAUTION C switch. 1) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity. 2) Turn the temperature control dial to maximum •...
Page 443 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. CONTROL SWITCHES Start the engine and warm-up completely. 1) Inspection using switches Point to check Switch operation Judgment standard Setting temperature display goes out. •Blower fan: OFF OFF switch Press the OFF switch.
Page 444 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 5) Inspection of rear cooler Point to check Switch operation Judgment standard Front A/C ON (compressor operating): COOL Roof grill Turn the FAN switch. Front A/C OFF (compressor not operating): Blower ON 6) Inspection of illumination control Point to check...
Page 445 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 3. Electrical Component Location A: LOCATION 1. ENGINE COMPARTMENT AC-01325 A/C compressor Pressure switch Ambient sensor A/C relay AC-01326 AC-00815 AC-00814 AC-01492 AC(diag)-6...
Page 446 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AC-01328 Evaporator sensor Blower motor Mode door actuator Passenger’s side air mix door Sunload sensor In-vehicle sensor actuator Intake door actuator Driver’s side air mix door actuator Auto A/C control module AC-01329 AC-01330...
Page 447 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Auto A/C Control Module I/O Signal HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. Auto A/C Control Module I/O Signal A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 13 12 11 16 15 14 13 12 11 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 A: B282 B: B283 AC-01334...
Page 448 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Auto A/C Control Module I/O Signal HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Terminal No. Description Measuring condition Specification Battery voltage — When switching mode door from DEF → FACE Mode door actuator power supply 2.5 V or more *2 (FACE) When switching mode door from FACE →...
Page 449 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 5. Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis A: OPERATION AC-01332 AUTO switch Defroster switch Air flow control switch OFF switch Rear window defogger switch FAN switch FRESH/RECIRC switch A/C switch NOTE: For A/C system self-diagnosis, there is one that checks the control panel, and the other that checks the whole control system (sensor, actuator, blower motor, etc.).
Page 450 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 1. A/C CONTROL PANEL SELF-DIAGNOSIS Step Check SET SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE BY OPERAT- Does the self-diagnosis func- Go to step 2. <Ref. to AC(diag)- ING A/C CONTROL PANEL. tion operate? 15, A/C OR SELF- 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON with the AUTO...
Page 451 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. SWITCH CHECK TABLE (11) (12) (10) (14) (15) (13) AC-01333 Switch Display screen Switch Display screen A/C switch FAN switch (+) AUTO switch FAN switch (–) Driver’s side temperature Right rotation (11) Air flow control switch...
Page 452 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 3. A/C CONTROL SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Step Check SET SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE BY OPERAT- Does the self-diagnosis func- Go to step 2. <Ref. to AC(diag)- ING A/C CONTROL PANEL. tion operate? 15, A/C OR SELF- 1) Start the engine with the auto switch and...
Page 453 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. SENSOR CHECK TABLE NOTE: When the sunload sensor check is performed indoors or in the shade, it could be diagnosed as having an open circuit. Always check the sunload sensor with the sun shining on it. Display screen Sensor Trouble contents...
Page 454 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 6. Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction A: A/C OR SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEMS DO NOT OPERATE TROUBLE SYMPTOM: • Set temperature is not indicated on the display, switch LEDs are faulty and switches do not operate. •...
Page 455 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Remove the fuse No. 7 from main fuse box. 3) Check the condition of fuse.
Page 456 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in connec- Repair the connec- Replace the auto Check poor contact of auto A/C control module tor? tor.
Page 457 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) B: BLOWER FAN DOES NOT ROTATE. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: • Blower motor does not rotate. • Blower motor does not rotate in “HI”. WIRING DIAGRAM: BATTERY MB-33 FUSE NO. 15 SBF-3 MAIN SBF IGNITION...
Page 458 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is any fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 2. 1) Remove the fuse No. 22 in fuse & relay box, and the fuse No.
Page 459 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) C: COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE DOES NOT CHANGE, OR A/C SYSTEM DOES NOT RESPOND PROMPTLY. WIRING DIAGRAM: IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY F/B No.22 SBF-6 MAIN SBF B360 B361 B136 THROUGH JOINT THROUGH JOINT CONNECTOR...
Page 460 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Remove the fuse No. 22 from fuse & relay box.
Page 461 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL. Is the voltage more than 10 V? Go to step 9. Go to step 8. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Connect the A/C relay and all disconnected connectors.
Page 462 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK THE MAGNET CLUTCH Is the magnetic clutch operat- Magnetic clutch is Replace the com- 1) Stop the engine, and turn the AUTO switch ing? normal.
Page 463 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 7. Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators A: INTAKE DOOR ACTUATOR TROUBLE SYMPTOM: FRESH/RECIRC mode is not changed. WIRING DIAGRAM: IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY F/B No.22 SBF-6 MAIN SBF INTAKE DOOR ACTUATOR AUTO A/C B283...
Page 464 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR INTAKE Is the voltage 8 V (at normal Go to step 2. Check for open or DOOR ACTUATOR. temperature)? short circuit in the 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Page 465 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) B: MODE DOOR ACTUATOR TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Air flow outlet is not changed. WIRING DIAGRAM: AUTO A/C B282 B283 CONTROL MODULE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR B282 B283 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 6 7 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5...
Page 466 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MODE DOOR Is the voltage approx. 5 V? Go to step 2. Replace the auto ACTUATOR POSITION SENSOR. A/C control mod- 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Page 467 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) C: AIR MIX DOOR ACTUATOR TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Outlet air temperature does not change. WIRING DIAGRAM: AUTO A/C B282 B283 CONTROL MODULE B390 B235 DRIVER'S AIR MIX PASSENGER'S AIR MIX DOOR ACTUATOR DOOR ACTUATOR B390...
Page 468 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AIR MIX Is the voltage approx. 5 V? Go to step 2. Replace the auto DOOR ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH. A/C control mod- 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Page 469 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AIR MIX DOOR ACTUATOR POSI- Does the voltage change Go to step 6. Replace the air mix TION SWITCH SIGNAL. between 1 V (Max. HOT) and 4 door actuator.
Page 470 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 8. Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors A: AMBIENT SENSOR TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Fan speed is not switched when the fan speed control dial is in AUTO position. WIRING DIAGRAM: AMBIENT SENSOR F108 THROUGH...
Page 471 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR. Is the resistance approximately Go to step 2. Replace the ambi- 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 1.7 kΩ at 25°C (77°F)? ent sensor.
Page 472 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) B: IN-VEHICLE SENSOR TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Blower fan speed, outlet port and inlet port do not change after turning the AUTO switch to ON WIRING DIAGRAM: IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AUTO A/C A: B282 CONTROL MODULE...
Page 473 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR. Is the resistance approximately Go to step 2. Replace the in- 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 1.7 kΩ at 20°C (68°F)? vehicle sensor.
Page 474 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) C: EVAPORATOR SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAM: AUTO A/C B282 CONTROL MODULE B282 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AC-00831 AC(diag)-35...
Page 475 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK EVAPORATOR SENSOR Is the resistance approximately Go to step 2. Replace the evap- 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 1.9 kΩ at 20°C (68°F)? orator sensor.
Page 476 asieps_tobira.book 37 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) D: SUNLOAD SENSOR TROUBLE SYMPTOM: • Sensor identifies that sunlight is at maximum. Then, A/C system is controlled to COOL side. • Sensor identifies that sunlight is at minimum. Then, A/C system is controlled to HOT side. NOTE: When the sunload sensor check is performed indoors or in the shade, it could be diagnosed as having an open circuit.
Page 477 asieps_tobira.book 38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE FOR Is the voltage approx. 5 V? Go to step 4. Go to step 2. SUNLOAD SENSOR. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) Disconnect the connector from sunload sensor.
Page 478 asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics with Phenomenon HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) 9. Diagnostics with Phenomenon A: INSPECTION Symptom Problem parts • Fuse (M/B No. 15, F/B No. 7, 22, 31) • Connector (Poor contact) • Ground • Auto A/C control module A/C system fails to operate.
Page 479 asieps_tobira.book 40 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics with Phenomenon HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) Symptom Problem parts • Air mix door actuator • In-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, evaporator sensor and Compartment temperature does not quickly respond to setting sunload sensor temperature. • In-vehicle sensor aspirator hose •...
Page 480 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 AIRBAG SYSTEM Page General Description ...................2 Airbag Connector ..................8 Inspection Locations After a Collision ............11 Driver’s Airbag Module ................14 Passenger’s Airbag Module ..............15 Side Airbag Module ..................16 Curtain Airbag Module ................18 Airbag Control Module ................19 Side Airbag Sensor ..................20 Curtain Airbag Sensor ................21 Roll Connector ..................22 Front Sub Sensor ..................23...
Page 481 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 1. General Description A: SPECIFICATION 1. HEATER SYSTEM Item Specification Condition • Mode selector switch: HEAT • Temperature control switch: FULL HOT 5.2 kW • Temperature difference between hot water Heating capacity (4,471 kcal/h, 17,743 BTU/h) and inlet air: 65°C (149°F)
Page 482 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 2. A/C SYSTEM • Single A/C model (front only) Item Specification Type of air conditioner Reheat air-mix type 6.2 kW Cooling capacity (5,331 kcal/h, 21,154 BTU/h) HFC-134a (CH Refrigerant 20 —...
Page 483 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) Item Specification Thermo-control amplifier working temperature (Evaporator outlet air) AC-00601 (1) ON (2) OFF (3) 1°C (33.8°F) +8.0 +46.4 (4) 1.5 °C (34.7 °F) • Dual A/C model (Front A/C and Rear cooler) Item Specification Front...
Page 484 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) Item Specification Front Fan type Sirocco fan Outer diameter × 165 × 70 mm (6.49 × 2.76 in) width Power consumption 260 W Blower fan Fan type Sirocco fan Outer diameter ×...
Page 485 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) B: COMPONENT 1. HEATER COOLING UNIT (21) (20) (19) (11) (16) (14) (18) (10) (13) (12) (17) (15) AC-01268 AC-6...
Page 486 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) Heater unit case LH Evaporator cover (17) Heater Core Separator (10) Power transistor (18) Heater pipe clamp Mode door RR (11) Pipe cover (19) Heater core cover Mode door FR (12) Drain hose (20)
Page 487 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 2. BLOWER MOTOR UNIT Front AC-01269 Upper case Filter cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Blower plate Control unit (Auto A/C model) T: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5) Lower case Intake door actuator Blower motor Filter AC-8...
Page 488 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) Rear AC-01315 Inner case Blower motor Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Evaporator Expansion valve T: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5) Outer case Expansion tube Blower resistor Cover AC-9...
Page 489 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 3. CONTROL PANEL AC-01478 Audio ASSY Center duct (RH) Navigation, MFD control switch Control panel Center duct (LH) Rear cooler model AC-01316 Dial Control panel Blower switch AC-10...
Page 490 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 4. AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AC-01479 Condenser Compressor Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Hose (High-pressure) O-ring T1: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5) T2: 10 (1.0, 7.4) Hose (Low-pressure) Clamp T3: 5 (0.5, 3.7) Bracket Tube AC-11...
Page 491 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 5. COMPRESSOR AC-01273 Compressor upper bracket Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Compressor T1: 26.5 (2.95, 21.3) Compressor lower bracket T2: 36 (3.7, 26.6) AC-12...
Page 492 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 6. HEATER DUCT (11) (10) AC-01493 Side ventilation duct (LH) Upper duct (LH) Side defroster duct (RH) Side ventilation duct (RH) Upper duct (RH) (10) Rear heater duct (LH) Center ventilation duct Center duct (RH) (11)
Page 493 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) C: CAUTION 4. HANDLING OF REFRIGERANT • The refrigerant boils at approx. –30°C (–22°F). 1. HFC-134A A/C SYSTEM When handling it, be sure to wear protective gog- • The cooling system components for the HFC- gles and protective gloves.
Page 494 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 5. O-RING CONNECTIONS • Use compressor oil specified in the service man- ual to lubricate the O-rings. • Always use a new O-ring. Apply oil to the top and sides of O-rings before in- •...
Page 495 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 73499XA00A S/T REMOVER PD Used to disconnect the connector for a quick joint type air conditioner piping (high pressure side). ST73499XA00A 73499XA01A S/T REMOVER PS...
Page 496 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 2. GENERAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION Name and Function WRENCH Various WRENCHES will be required to service any A/C system. A 7 to 40 N·m (0.7 to 4.1 kg-m, 5 to 30 ft-lb) torque wrench and various crow- foot wrenches will be needed.
Page 497 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) ILLUSTRATION Name and Function Syringe A graduated plastic SYRINGE will be needed to add oil into the system again. A syringe can be available at a pharmacy or drug store. AC-00015 Vacuum pump A VACUUM PUMP is necessary (for a good working condition), and...
Page 498 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) ILLUSTRATION Name and Function Scale A WEIGHT SCALE such as an electronic charging scale or a bath- room scale with digital display will be needed, if a 13.6 kg (30 lb) refrig- erant container is used.
Page 499 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Refrigerant Pressure with Manifold Gauge Set HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 2. Refrigerant Pressure with Manifold Gauge Set A: PROCEDURE 1) Place the vehicle in the shade and windless condition. 2) Connect the manifold gauge set. 3) Open all windows and close all doors.
Page 500 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Refrigerant Recovery Procedure HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 3. Refrigerant Recovery Proce- 4) Install the low/high pressure hoses to the service ports on the low/high pressure sides of the vehicle dure respectively. A: PROCEDURE CAUTION: •...
Page 501 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Refrigerant Charging Procedure HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 4. Refrigerant Charging Proce- 4) Carefully open the valves on the low/high pres- sure sides to activate the vacuum pump. dure A: PROCEDURE CAUTION: • During operation, be sure to wear protective goggles and protective gloves.
Page 502 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Refrigerant Charging Procedure HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 7) Note the low-pressure gauge reading. 12) Confirm that all the 3 hoses are connected se- curely to the manifold gauge set. AC-00027 AC-00030 8) Leave it at least 5 minutes, and then check the low-pressure gauge reading for any changes.
Page 503 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Refrigerant Charging Procedure HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 17) After confirming that there are no leaks with the 22) Set up the vehicle as follows: leak test, charge the required amount of refrigerant. • A/C switch ON •...
Page 504 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Refrigerant Leak Check HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 5. Refrigerant Leak Check 9) Visually check the rubber area of the flexible hose for cracks. A: INSPECTION Check the entire length of the flexible hose, espe- cially the connection with the metal hose end.
Page 505 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Compressor Oil HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 6. Compressor Oil A: PROCEDURE NOTE: Before making repairs, perform the oil return oper- ation to return the compressor oil in circulation with the refrigerant to the compressor. 1) Increase the engine to 1,500 rpm.
Page 506 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Blower Motor Unit Assembly HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 7. Blower Motor Unit Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the glove box. <Ref. to EI-37, REMOV- AL, Glove Box.> 3) Disconnect the connectors of the A/C control module, intake door actuator, blower motor, power transistor and blower resistor.
Page 507 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Blower Motor HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 8. Blower Motor A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the glove box lower cover. <Ref. to EI- 37, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> 3) Disconnect the connector of the blower motor. 4) Loosen the screw to remove the blower motor.
Page 508 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Transistor (Auto A/C Model) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 9. Power Transistor (Auto A/C Model) A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the glove box lower cover on the pas- senger’s side. <Ref. to EI-37, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>...
Page 509 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Blower Resistor (Dual A/C Model) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 10.Blower Resistor (Dual A/C Model) A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the left rear quarter trim. <Ref. to EI-45, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.> 2) Disconnect the blower resistor connector. 3) Remove the lock (A) and rotate it to the right to remove the blower resistor.
Page 510 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Heater Core HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 11.Heater Core A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Draw out the refrigerant with the refrigerant re- covery unit <Ref. to AC-21, PROCEDURE, Refrig- erant Recovery Procedure.>...
Page 511 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Panel HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 12.Control Panel A: REMOVAL 1. FRONT 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the front console panel. <Ref. to ET-14, REMOVAL, Audio.> 3) Remove the instrument panel ornament and the drivers side and passengers side inner panels.
Page 512 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Unit (Auto A/C Model) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 13.Control Unit (Auto A/C Model) A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the glove box. <Ref. to EI-37, REMOV- AL, Glove Box.> 3) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector and remove the control unit.
Page 513 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Compressor HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 14.Compressor 9) Remove the bolts and remove the compressor bracket. A: INSPECTION 1. MAGNETIC CLUTCH CLEARANCE Check the clearance of the entire circumference around the drive plate and pulley. Standard: ±...
Page 514 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Condenser HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 15.Condenser B: INSTALLATION 1) Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL CAUTION: 1) Using the refrigerant recovery system, dis- Replace the O-rings on hoses or pipes with new charge refrigerant.
Page 515 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Heater and Cooling Unit HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 16.Heater and Cooling Unit B: INSTALLATION 1) Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL 2) Charge refrigerant. <Ref. to AC-22, PROCE- 1. FRONT DURE, Refrigerant Charging Procedure.> 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
Page 516 asieps_tobira.book 37 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Evaporator HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 17.Evaporator 7) Remove the pipe cover from the evaporator. A: REMOVAL 1. FRONT 1) Using the refrigerant recovery system, dis- charge refrigerant. <Ref. to AC-21, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.> 2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
Page 517 asieps_tobira.book 38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Evaporator HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 5) Remove the screws, and then remove the cooler unit. AC-01344 6) Remove from the cooler unit and disconnect the tube from the evaporator. CAUTION: When replacing the evaporator, add an appro- priate amount of compressor oil to the evapora- tor.
Page 518 asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Hose and Tube HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 18.Hose and Tube 13) Remove the high-pressure tube from vehicle. A: REMOVAL CAUTION: • When disconnecting/connecting hoses, do not apply an excessive force to them. After in- stalling, check that no torsion or excessive ten- sion applied to the hoses.
Page 519 asieps_tobira.book 40 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Hose and Tube HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 2. Insert the remover. 4. Pull the remover (2) and separate the tube (3) from the quick connector (1). AC-01496 AC-01498 Do not bend the needle (4) in the remover. 5.
Page 520 asieps_tobira.book 41 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Hose and Tube HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 9) Remove the front tube (E) and rear tube (F). AC-01319 B: INSTALLATION CAUTION: • When disconnecting or connecting the hos- es, do not apply excessive force. After install- ing, check that no torsion or excessive tension applied to the hoses.
Page 521 asieps_tobira.book 42 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Relay and Fuse HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 19.Relay and Fuse Main fan relay 1 Main fan relay 2 A: LOCATION Sub fan relay A/C relay A/C Fuse Front blower relay Rear blower relay B: INSPECTION •...
Page 522 asieps_tobira.book 43 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Relay and Fuse HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) • Main fan relay 1, Front blower relay • Rear blower relay AC-01486 AC-01487 (3) — (4): Continuity exists (3) — (4): Continuity exists (1) — (2): Continuity does not exist (1) —...
Page 523 asieps_tobira.book 44 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pressure Switch (Triple Pressure Switch) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 20.Pressure Switch (Triple Pressure Switch) A: INSPECTION 1) Connect the manifold gauge to the service valve on the high-pressure side. 2) Operate the air conditioner, and check the switch operating pressure on ON/OFF in the compressor (mag- net clutch).
Page 524 asieps_tobira.book 45 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Actuator HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 21.Actuator 3. AIR MIX DOOR ACTUATOR (AUTO A/C MODEL) A: REMOVAL Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and then remove the air mix door actuator from the 1. MODE DOOR ACTUATOR heater and cooling unit.
Page 525 asieps_tobira.book 46 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Ambient Sensor (Auto A/C Model) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 22.Ambient Sensor (Auto A/C Model) A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. 3) Remove the ambient sensor from the radiator lower panel.
Page 526 asieps_tobira.book 47 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunload Sensor (Auto A/C Model) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 23.Sunload Sensor (Auto A/C Model) A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the sun- load sensor. AC-01308 CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the interior trims...
Page 527 asieps_tobira.book 48 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 In-vehicle Sensor (Auto A/C Model) HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 24.In-vehicle Sensor (Auto A/C Model) A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the instrument panel lower panel on driver’s side. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, Instru- ment Panel Lower Cover.>...
Page 528 asieps_tobira.book 49 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Air Vent Grille HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 25.Air Vent Grille 3. SIDE GRILLE Remove the catch in 2 locations to remove the side A: REMOVAL air vent grill. 1. UPPER GRILL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Lift the upper grill, and remove the catch on the hazard switch side.
Page 529 asieps_tobira.book 50 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Heater Duct HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 26.Heater Duct A: REMOVAL 1. FRONT HEATER DUCT 1) Remove the instrument panel lower cover. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, Instrument Panel Lower Cov- er.> 2) Remove the catch and detach the front heater duct (A).
Page 530 asieps_tobira.book 51 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Heater Vent Duct HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 27.Heater Vent Duct A: REMOVAL 1. INSTRUMENT 1) Remove the instrument panel. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, Instrument Panel Lower Cover.> 2) Remove the screws and detach the center vent duct (A).
Page 531 asieps_tobira.book 52 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 A/C Filter HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 28.A/C Filter A: REPLACEMENT 1) Remove the instrument panel lower cover. <Ref. to EI-37, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> 2) Remove the 2 clips and the damper (string) AC-01382 (1) Clip (2) Damper (String) 3) Remove the glove box.
Page 532 asieps_tobira.book 53 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Diagnostic Table HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) 29.General Diagnostic Table A: INSPECTION Symptom Repair order Fuse Blower motor relay Blower motor Does not operate. Blower motor resistor Blower motor Blower switch Wiring harness Blower motor Strange noise Air conditioner filter Refrigerant...
Page 533 asieps_tobira.book 54 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Diagnostic Table HVAC SYSTEM (HEATER, VENTILATOR AND A/C) Symptom Repair order Rear cooler blower Rear cooler blower resistor Air is not emitted from the rear A/C. Rear A/C switch Wiring harness A/C switch Compressor Cold air is not emitted from the rear A/C. Rear A/C switch Rear cooler expansion valve AC-54...
Page 534 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 HVAC SYSTEM (AUTO A/C) (DIAGNOSTICS) AC(diag) Page Basic Diagnostic Procedure ...............2 General Description ...................3 Electrical Component Location ..............6 Auto A/C Control Module I/O Signal ............8 Diagnostic Chart for Self-diagnosis ............10 Diagnostics for A/C System Malfunction ..........15 Diagnostic Procedure for Actuators ............24 Diagnostic Procedure for Sensors ............31 Diagnostics with Phenomenon ..............39...
Page 535 Repair the related 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. screen? parts. 2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. <Ref. to IM(diag)-7, Subaru Select Monitor.> 3) Turn the ignition switch to ON and run the Subaru Select Monitor.
Page 536 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. General Description • When repeatedly turning the ignition switch to ON or OFF while diagnostic items are being A: CAUTION checked, it should be switched in cycles of “ON” for at least 5 seconds → “OFF” for at least CAUTION: 8 seconds.
Page 537 General Description IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) B: PREPARATION TOOL 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Troubleshooting for the electrical system. MONITOR KIT ST1B020XU0 2. GENERAL TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.
Page 538 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 3. Electrical Component Location A: LOCATION SECURITY IM-00140 Antenna Body integrated unit Transponder Security indicator light (LED bulb) IM(diag)-5...
Page 539 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Immobilizer Control Module I/O Signal IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. Immobilizer Control Module I/O Signal A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. IMMOBILIZER <Ref. to WI-75, WIRING DIAGRAM, Immobilizer System.> IM(diag)-6...
Page 540 2) Connect the diagnosis cable to Subaru Select 2) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select the Monitor. {Each System Check}. 3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link 3) On the «System Selection Menu» display connector. screen, select the {Engine Control System}.
Page 541 5) On the «Diagnostic Code(s) Display» screen, select the {Current Diagnostic Code(s)} or {History Diagnostic Code(s)}. NOTE: • For detailed operation procedure, refer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL”. • For detailed concerning DTC, refer to the List of DTC.
Page 542 {Clear Memory}. 5) When the ‘Done’ are shown on the display screen, turn the ignition switch to OFF and close the Subaru Select Monitor. NOTE: • After the memory has been cleared, the idle air control solenoid valve must be initialized. To exe- cute this procedure, turn the ignition switch to ON.
Page 543 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics Chart for Security Indicator Light IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 8. Diagnostics Chart for Security Indicator Light A: INSPECTION 1. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT WIRING DIAGRAM: BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF-8 F/B No.7 WARNING BOX i116 IGNITION SWITCH i124 SECURITY SBF-3...
Page 544 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics Chart for Security Indicator Light IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LIGHT. Does the security indicator light Go to step 2. Go to step 5. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. illuminate? 2) Disconnect the harness connector from body integrated unit.
Page 545 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics Chart for Security Indicator Light IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT WIRING DIAGRAM: BATTERY M/B No.14 KEY WARNING SWITCH B350 B281 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B350 B281 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 27 28...
Page 546 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostics Chart for Security Indicator Light IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Check the harness 1) Disconnect the harness connector from key for open or short warning switch.
Page 547 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 9. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: LIST 1. ECM Item Contents of diagnosis Index No. P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key Incorrect immobilizer key (Use of <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCOR- unregistered key in body integrated RECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Pro- unit)
Page 548 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. BODY INTEGRATED UNIT Relation between ECM and Item Contents of diagnosis Index No. B1401 M collation NG Reference code incompatibil- <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1578 ity between body integrated P1578 METER FAILURE, Diag- unit and combination meter nostic Procedure with Diagnos-...
Page 549 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) 10.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Incorrect immobilizer key (Use of unregistered key in body integrated unit) Step Check PERFORM TEACHING OPERATION OF IG-...
Page 550 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) B: DTC P1570 ANTENNA DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Faulty antenna WIRING DIAGRAM: ANTENNA B351 B281 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B351 B281 5 6 7 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23...
Page 551 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK ANTENNA CIRCUIT. Is the resistance less than 10 Go to step 2. Replace the Ω? 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. antenna. <Ref. to 2) Disconnect the harness connector from SL-54, Immobi- antenna.
Page 552 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK IGNITION KEY (TRANSPONDER). Does the engine start? Replace all the Replace the body 1) Remove the key from ignition switch. ignition keys integrated unit 2) Start the engine using other key which is (including tran- <Ref.
Page 553 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) D: DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT ANTENNA CIRCUIT) DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Communication failure between body integrated unit and ECM WIRING DIAGRAM: IGNITION BATTERY SWITCH MAIN SBF SBF-3 F/B No.12 SBF-8...
Page 554 Perform the regis- 3) Start the communication line check. <Ref. to all the ignition keys IM(diag)-7, COMMUNICATION LINE CHECK, (including tran- tration procedure OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> sponder). Execute next. Refer to the the registration “REGISTRATION procedure next. MANUAL FOR Refer to the “REG-...
Page 555 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) E: DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Failure of body integrated unit to verify key (transponder) ID code or transponder key failure Step Check CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT FUNC- Go to step 2.
Page 556 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) G: DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Body integrated unit malfunctioning • Failed to access ROM inside the body integrated unit. Step Check PERFORM TEACHING OPERATION OF IG- Is the teaching operation for all Make sure it is pos-...
Page 557 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IMMOBILIZER (DIAGNOSTICS) IM(diag)-24...
Page 558 Basic Diagnostic Procedure ...............2 Check List for Interview ................3 General Description ...................5 Electrical Component Location ..............7 Control Module I/O Signal ................9 Subaru Select Monitor ................12 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .............24 Clear Memory Mode .................25 Read Current Data ...................26 Function Setting (Customize) ..............27 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............28...
Page 559 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 1. General Description A: SPECIFICATION Speedometer Stepping motor type Tachometer Malfunction indicator light Oil pressure warning light ABS warning light Airbag warning light Seat belt warning light Brake fluid and parking brake warning light Low fuel warning light Charge warning light ATF temperature warning light...
Page 560 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO B: CAUTION • Be careful not to damage the meters and instru- ment panel. • Be careful not to damage the meter glass. • Make sure the electrical connector is connected securely. •...
Page 561 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 2. Combination Meter System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. COMBINATION METER <Ref. to WI-139, WIRING DIAGRAM, Combination Meter System.> B: INSPECTION 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS The self-diagnosis (checking of each meter, warn- ing light, indicator, illumination, LCD, buzzer sound) of combination meter can be performed in the following procedure.
Page 562 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 2. LIST OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE OPERATION Speedometer, Microcomputer AT select lever Odo/Trip indica- SPORT shift Illumination Buzzer (SPORT tachometer, fuel running type position indica- indicator (indicator nee- shift buzzer) gauge, engine warning light, tor light dle, plate, ring,...
Page 563 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO Speedometer, Microcomputer AT select lever Odo/Trip indica- SPORT shift Illumination Buzzer (SPORT tachometer, fuel running type position indica- indicator (indicator nee- shift buzzer) gauge, engine warning light, tor light dle, plate, ring, coolant temper- indicator light LCD)
Page 564 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 3. SYMPTOM CHART Symptom Repair order Reference Combination meter assembly does not operate. 1. Power supply <Ref. to IDI-8, CHECK 2. Ground circuit POWER SUPPLY AND 3. Combination meter GROUND CIRCUIT, INSPECTION, Combi- nation Meter System.>...
Page 565 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Check the harness TION METER. for open or short 1) Remove the combination meter.
Page 566 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 5. CHECK VDCCM Step Check Is the voltage less than 1 V ←→ CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL. Replace the meter Go to step 2. 1) Lift up the vehicle and support it with rigid 5 V or more? case assembly.
Page 567 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 7. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Step Check CHECK COMMUNICATION ERROR DIS- Is the error code “Er xx” dis- Check the commu- Go to step 2. PLAY. played on odo/trip meter? nication circuit. 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Page 568 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter System INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 8. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Step Check CHECK COMMUNICATION ERROR DIS- Is the error code “Er xx” dis- Check the commu- Go to step 2. PLAY. played on odo/trip meter? nication circuit.
Page 569 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 3. Combination Meter B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL CAUTION: 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. • Make sure the electrical connector is con- 2) Set the tilt steering at the lowest position. nected securely.
Page 570 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Meter INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO C: DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: • Use gloves to avoid damage and getting fingerprints on the glass surface and meter surfaces. • Be careful not to apply excessive force to the trip knob. • Be sure not to touch the meter indicator needle. Disengage the claw (A), and remove the visor assembly and meter case cover (B), and cover glass (C) from the meter panel assembly (D).
Page 571 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Speedometer INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 4. Speedometer A: SPECIFICATION Since the meter case assembly cannot be disas- sembled, do not remove or inspect the speedome- ter alone. (Do not remove the cover on the back side.) IDI-14...
Page 572 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Tachometer INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 5. Tachometer A: SPECIFICATION Since the meter case assembly cannot be disas- sembled, do not remove or inspect the tachometer alone. (Do not remove the cover on the back side.) IDI-15...
Page 573 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Fuel Gauge INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 6. Fuel Gauge A: SPECIFICATION Since the meter case assembly cannot be disas- sembled, do not remove or inspect the fuel gauge as alone. (Do not remove the cover on the back side.) IDI-16...
Page 574 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 7. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge A: SPECIFICATION Since the meter case assembly cannot be disas- sembled, do not remove or inspect the temperature gauge alone. (Do not remove the cover on the back side.) IDI-17...
Page 575 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Warning Box INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO 8. Warning Box A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the upper grille. <Ref. to AC-49, UP- PER GRILL, REMOVAL, Air Vent Grille.> 3) Remove the screws of warning box (1) and pull out the warning box.
Page 576 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 SEATS Page General Description ...................2 Front Seat ....................7 Second-Row Seats ..................13 Third-Row Seats ..................18 Seat Heater System .................20 Power Seat System ..................21...
Page 577 1. WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR CAUTION: • Subaru Select Monitor is required for reading DTC, performing diagnosis and reading current data. • Remove foreign matter (dust, water, oil, etc.) from the body integrated unit connector during re- moval and installation.
Page 578 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Check List for Interview LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. Check List for Interview A: CHECK Inspect the following item about the vehicle’s state. 1. DISPLAY OF COMMUNICATION ERROR Communication error is When and how often are they displayed? displayed in odo/trip meter.
Page 579 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Check List for Interview LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH TROUBLE OCCURS Driving condition At standstill (While idling) When the vehicle is running Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Accelerating Acceleration km/h (MPH) to km/h (MPH) Decelerating (With braking) Deceleration km/h (MPH) to km/h (MPH)
Page 580 High, CAN Low). FUNCTION SETTING (ECM CUSTOMIZING), OP- • Difference of bus line length should be within 10 ERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> cm (3.94 in). 6) Confirm “Factory initial setting” of body integrat- • Fray near the connector should be within 8 cm ed unit registrations is “Market”.
Page 581 LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) C: PREPARATION TOOL 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system. MONITOR KIT ST1B020XU0 2. GENERAL TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.
Page 582 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. Electrical Component Location A: LOCATION (7),(10) (12) (11) LAN00181 Body integrated unit Transmission control module VDCCM&H/U (TCM) (In engine compartment) Engine control module (ECM) Auto A/C control module Combination meter (10) Odo/trip meter Keyless entry control module...
Page 583 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) LAN00182 LAN00183 (10) LAN00184 LAN00185 LAN00186 LAN00187 (11) LAN00188 LAN(diag)-8...
Page 584 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Module I/O Signal LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 5. Control Module I/O Signal A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION side side B281 side B280 16 15 13 12 14 13 CS-00273 Signal (V) Connector Description Terminal No. Note Ignition switch ON (engine OFF) System control power B281...
Page 585 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Module I/O Signal LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Signal (V) Connector Description Terminal No. Note Ignition switch ON (engine OFF) Door switch Less than 1 V (10 — 13 V at OFF) Trunk/Rear gate open (ON) Trunk/Rear gate Manual switch (LOCK) Less than 1 Ω...
Page 586 B281 20 — 21 Serial communication Immobilizer communication B280 Serial communication (Main) (Back-up 28) Subaru Select Monitor com- B280 Serial communication munication B: WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to the electrical wiring diagram. <Ref. to WI-79, WIRING DIAGRAM, CAN Communication System.> LAN(diag)-11...
Page 587 1) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. 2) Connect the diagnosis cable to Subaru Select Monitor. 3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. Data link connector is located in the lower portion of instrument panel (on the driver’s side).
Page 588 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. READ CURRENT DATA 1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select the {Each System Check}. 2) On the «System Selection Menu» display screen, select the {Integ. unit mode}. 3) On the «Integ. unit mode failure diag» display screen, select the {Current Data Display & Save}.
Page 589 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. DISPLAY OF ON/OFF DATA Items to be displayed Unit of measure Description Note key-lock warning SW ON/OFF Body integrated unit input value ON when ignition key is inserted Stop light SW...
Page 590 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Items to be displayed Unit of measure Description Note R wiper output ON/OFF Body integrated unit output value ON when rear wiper motor is operating Shift Lock Solenoid ON/OFF Body integrated unit output value...
Page 591 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Items to be displayed Unit of measure Description Note Blinks when there is an AT failure ATF Blink Blink/Off CAN data input value Reception from TCM and transmission to combination meter...
Page 592 Displays the number when operating the Touch SW 0 — 64 CAN data input value navigation monitor touch switch Reception from monitor (except MFD) NOTE: For details concerning operation procedure, refer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MAN- UAL”. LAN(diag)-17...
Page 593 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 5. CONFIRMATION OF CURRENT SETTING 1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select the {Each System Check}. 2) On the «System Selection Menu» display screen, select the {Integ. unit mode}.
Page 594 Not supported by North American specifications 6. REGISTRATION BODY INTEGRATED 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. UNIT (EQUIPMENT SETTING) 2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. CAUTION: Body integrated unit is core of LAN system, and also can select the function of all vehicle sys- tem control.
Page 595 (caused by low power supply of body inte- dures of the “IMMOBILIZER REGISTRATION OP- grated unit), DTC will be displayed with “?” on the ERATION MANUAL”. head of it in the Subaru Select Monitor display. This shows it may be an unreliable reading. LAN(diag)-20...
Page 596 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 9. FUNCTION SETTING (ECM CUSTOMIZING) 1) On the «Main Menu» display screen, select the {Each System Check}. 2) On the «System Selection Menu» display screen, select the {Integ. unit mode}.
Page 597 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Subaru Select Monitor LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Initial setting Customize Data Remarks Destination Specifications value setting Siren sounds when alarm operates. (Set siren setting to “OFF” in model without siren. Not supported by North Siren setting Horn does not sound if siren setting is set to “ON”.) American specifications Horn sounds when alarm operates.
Page 598 • Do not change the settings except for setting above during operation of equipment setting. • Be sure not to change Factory initial setting except installation of new body integrated unit. NOTE: For details concerning operation procedure, refer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MAN- UAL”. 10.FUNCTION CHECK In order to check the body integrated unit function, inspect the body integrated unit and actuator using Sub- aru Select Monitor without operating switches.
Page 599 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 7. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: OPERATION For details concerning DTC reading procedure, re- fer to “Subaru Select Monitor”. <Ref. to LAN(diag)- 12, READ DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> LAN(diag)-24...
Page 600 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Clear Memory Mode LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 8. Clear Memory Mode A: OPERATION For details concerning DTC clear operation, refer to “Subaru Select Monitor”. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-20, CLEAR MEMORY MODE, OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> LAN(diag)-25...
Page 601 5) Using the scroll key, scroll the display screen up or down until the desired data is shown. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-13, DISPLAY OF ANALOG DA- TA, OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> <Ref. to LAN(diag)-14, DISPLAY OF ON/OFF DATA, OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> <Ref. to LAN(diag)-18, CONFIRMATION OF CURRENT SETTING, OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>...
Page 602 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Function Setting (Customize) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 10.Function Setting (Customize) A: OPERATION For detailed procedures of function setting (ECM customizing), refer to “SUBARU SELECT MONI- TOR”. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-21, FUNCTION SET- TING (ECM CUSTOMIZING), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>...
Page 603 11.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: LIST Item Content of diagnosis Note None Communication for Initializing Open or short in Subaru Select <Ref. to LAN(diag)-31, COMMUNICATION FOR Impossible Monitor communication line INITIALIZING IMPOSSIBLE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).> None...
Page 604 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Item Content of diagnosis Note U1300 CAN-LS Malfunction Open or short in CAN-LS <Ref. to LAN(diag)-66, DTC U1300 CAN-LS circuit, on each side or both MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with sides.
Page 605 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 1. DTC TABLE NOTE: When more than two DTC codes are recorded, referring to their combination will make it easy to identify the possible cause. Refer to the list for typical examples. DTC to Check Diagnostic Code that was displayed.
Page 606 • DTC is displayed in the sequence of the amount of counter numbers. • When more than two DTCs are displayed, perform the diagnosis of top one. DIAGNOSIS: Subaru Select Monitor communication line is open or shorted. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Not communicable with Subaru Select Monitor.
Page 607 Go to step 5. LECT MONITOR. played? 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, check whether communication to other systems can be executed normally. CHECK COMMUNICATION OF SUBARU SE- Are system and model year dis- Go to step 7.
Page 608 • Communication error display in odo/trip meter is not cleared. • “No trouble code” is displayed on Subaru Select Monitor. NOTE: If DTC is not displayed on Subaru Select Monitor, LAN communication System should be OK. Step Check CHECK COMMUNICATION ERROR DIS- Go to step 2.
Page 609 Step Check CHECK DTC. Go to step 2. Is there any DTC other than for Perform the diag- Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read all the body integrated unit? nosis according to DTCs. the DTC of other control modules.
Page 610 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) D: DTC B1101 BATT P/SUPPLY MALFUNCTION CONT. DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Battery power supply control circuit is open or shorted. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: No malfunction occurs because the back-up power supply is activated. NOTE: When B1102 BATT p/supply (backup) malfunction is output at the same time, all the function of body inte- grated unit may fail to operate.
Page 611 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (No. 7). If the 2) Remove the fuse (No.
Page 612 asieps_tobira.book 37 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) E: DTC B1102 BATT P/SUPPLY MALFUNCTION CONT. DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Battery power supply backup circuit is open or shorted. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: • Engine malfunction indicator light may illuminates. •...
Page 613 asieps_tobira.book 38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (No. 8). If the 2) Remove the fuse (No.
Page 614 asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) F: DTC B1103 IGNITION POWER FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: IGN power supply circuit is open or shorted. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Symptoms such as illuminating the malfunction indicator light or high speed CAN error display “Er HC” may occur.
Page 615 asieps_tobira.book 40 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (No. 12). If the 2) Remove the fuse (No.
Page 616 asieps_tobira.book 41 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) G: DTC B1104 ACC POWER FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: ACC power supply circuit is open or shorted. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Rear wiper may not operate at ACC position. WIRING DIAGRAM: IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY...
Page 617 asieps_tobira.book 42 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse Go to step 2. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (No. 31). If the 2) Remove the fuse (No.
Page 618 asieps_tobira.book 43 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) H: DTC B1106 SHIFT LOCK CIRCUIT FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Shift lock circuit is shorted to ground. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: Shift lock does not be released or remain locked. WIRING DIAGRAM: TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FB-28...
Page 619 asieps_tobira.book 44 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK HARNESS. Is the resistance between 10 — Go to step 5. Go to step 2. 30 Ω? 1) Disconnect the body integrated unit connec- tor (B280).
Page 620 asieps_tobira.book 45 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) I: DTC U1201 CAN-HS COUNTER ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: High speed CAN communication of body integrated unit which monitor the error data and non-received data are faulty. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: •...
Page 621 Step Check CHECK DTC. Is there any DTC other than for Perform the diag- Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read all the body integrated unit? nosis according to DTCs. the DTC of other control modules.
Page 622 asieps_tobira.book 47 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK HARNESS. Is the resistance between 115 Go to step 13. Go to step 14. — 125 Ω? 1) Disconnect the VDCCM connector. 2) Connect the tester to vehicle side harness, and measure the resistance.
Page 623 Go to step 21. Check the TCM. 1) Connect all the control module connectors. <Ref. to 5AT(diag)- 2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and per- 15, READ DIAG- form the clear memory. NOSTIC TROU- 3) Disconnect the TCM connector (B54).
Page 624 asieps_tobira.book 49 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) J: DTC U1202 CAN-HS BUS OFF DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Find the unit or CAN line in which trouble occurs, and repair and replace it. • Not received data and error data may be detected at the same time. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: “Er HC”...
Page 625 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Do all data values match? A temporary poor Go to step 4. On the Subaru Select Monitor, display engine contact has speed and vehicle speed at the ECM, TCM, occurred. Perform VDC/ABS and body integrated unit under the the Clear Memory same conditions, and compare the data.
Page 626 (B280) No. 30 (+) — Chassis ground (–): CHECK DTC. Is DTC other than “CAN com- Perform the diag- Go to step 17. Read the DTC of ECM using the Subaru Select munication” displayed? nosis according to DTC. Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H6DO)(diag)-37, OPERA- TION, Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>...
Page 627 asieps_tobira.book 52 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) K: DTC U1211 CAN-HS ECM DATA ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Defective data from ECM. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: “Er HC” or “Er EG” is displayed in odo/trip meter. WIRING DIAGRAM: TERMINAL No.
Page 628 Step Check CHECK DTC. Is there any DTC other than for Perform the diag- Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read all the body integrated unit? nosis according to DTCs. the DTC of other control modules.
Page 629 asieps_tobira.book 54 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) L: DTC U1212 CAN-HS TCM DATA ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: TCM has error, harness between the main harness splice and TCM is open or shorted, connectors are not connected securely, or the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 630 CHECK TCM. Is DTC other than “CAN com- Perform the diag- Replace the TCM. Read the DTC of TCM using the Subaru Select munication” displayed? nosis according to <Ref. to 5AT-58, Monitor. <Ref. to 5AT(diag)-15, OPERATION, DTC.
Page 631 asieps_tobira.book 56 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) M: DTC U1213 CAN-HS VDC/ABS DATA ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: VDCCM body has error, the main harness is open or shorted, the connector is not connected properly, or the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 632 Step Check CHECK DTC. Is there any DTC other than for Perform the diag- Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read all the body integrated unit? nosis according to DTCs. the DTC of other control modules.
Page 633 asieps_tobira.book 58 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) N: DTC U1221 CAN-HS ECM NO-RECEIVE DATA DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Defective ECM. (If error is in the main harness, DTC P0600 CAN communication link is input simultaneous- ly.) NOTE: When more than two DTCs are displayed.
Page 634 Step Check CHECK DTC. Is there any DTC other than for Perform the diag- Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read all the body integrated unit? nosis according to DTCs. the DTC of other control modules.
Page 635 Module (ECM).> 28, READ DIAG- NOSTIC TROU- BLE CODE (DTC) FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA- TION, Subaru Select Monitor.> CHECK HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the short Go to step 10. Ω? 1) Disconnect the ECM connector (B137).
Page 636 asieps_tobira.book 61 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) O: DTC U1222 CAN-HS TCM NO-RECEIVE DATA DTC DETECTING CONDITION: TCM has error, harness between the main harness splice and TCM is open or shorted, connectors are not connected securely, or the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 637 (B54) No. 3 — No. 4: harness. CHECK TCM. Is DTC other than “CAN com- Perform the diag- Replace the TCM. Read the DTC of TCM using the Subaru Select munication” displayed? nosis according to <Ref. to 5AT-58, Monitor. <Ref. to 5AT(diag)-15, OPERATION, DTC.
Page 638 asieps_tobira.book 63 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) P: DTC U1223 CAN-HS VDC/ABS NO-RECEIVE DATA DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Defective VDCCM. (If error is in the main harness, DTC P0600 High-speed CAN circuit is input at the same time.) NOTE: When more than two DTCs are displayed.
Page 639 Step Check CHECK DTC. Is there any DTC other than for Perform the diag- Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read all the body integrated unit? nosis according to DTCs. the DTC of other control modules.
Page 640 Is DTC other than “CAN com- Perform the diag- Replace the 1) Connect all the connectors. munication” displayed? nosis according to VDCCM. <Ref. to 2) Read the DTC of VDCCM using Subaru DTC concerning VDC-8, VDC Con- Select Monitor. VDCCM. trol Module and Hydraulic Control Unit (VDCCM&H/...
Page 641 asieps_tobira.book 66 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Q: DTC U1300 CAN-LS MALFUNCTION DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Either end of low-speed CAN communication line is open or shorted, the connector is not connected prop- erly, or the terminal has poor crimping. TROUBLE SYMPTOM: “Er LC”...
Page 642 Step Check CHECK DTC. Are there any other DTC Perform diagnosis Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read besides U1300? according to other the DTC of the body integrated unit. DTC. CHECK DTC. Is the DTC displayed a current Replace the body Go to step 3.
Page 643 asieps_tobira.book 68 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the short Go to step 10. Ω? 1) Connect the junction connector. circuit of harness 2) Measure the resistance between body inte- or replace har- grated unit connector and chassis ground.
Page 644 asieps_tobira.book 69 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) R: DTC U1301 CAN-LS COUNTER ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Find the unit in which trouble occurs and open or short CAN line, and repair and replace them. (Free running counter error may be detected at the same time from the unit in which malfunction occurs.) TROUBLE SYMPTOM: “Er LC”...
Page 645 Step Check CHECK DTC. Are there any other DTC Perform diagnosis Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read besides U1301? according to other the DTC of the body integrated unit. DTC. CHECK DTC. Is the DTC displayed a current Replace the body Go to step 3.
Page 646 Is “Yes” displayed? Go to step 13. Replace the body Read the data of “body integrated unit data integrated unit. received” on ECM data display using Subaru <Ref. to SL-51, Select Monitor. REMOVAL, Body Integrated Unit.> CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT.
Page 647 asieps_tobira.book 72 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) S: DTC U1302 CAN-LS BUS OFF DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Because of a lot of error data occurred, some units have been disconnected not to affect other units. Communication failure from the unit in which error is occurred is input at the same time.
Page 648 Step Check CHECK DTC. Are there any other DTC Perform diagnosis Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read besides U1302? according to other the DTC of the body integrated unit. DTC. CHECK DTC. Is the DTC displayed a current Replace the body Go to step 3.
Page 649 Is “Yes” displayed? Go to step 13. Replace the body Read the data of “body integrated unit data integrated unit. received” on ECM data display using Subaru <Ref. to SL-51, Select Monitor. REMOVAL, Body Integrated Unit.> CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT.
Page 650 asieps_tobira.book 75 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) T: DTC U1311 CAN-LS METER UNIT DATA ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Combination meter has error, the harness between main harness splice and combination meter is open or shorted, the connector is not connected properly, or the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 651 Step Check CHECK DTC. Are there any other DTC Perform diagnosis Go to step 2. Connect the Subaru Select Monitor and read besides U1311? according to other the DTC of the body integrated unit. DTC. CHECK DTC. Is the DTC displayed a current Replace the body Go to step 3.
Page 652 asieps_tobira.book 77 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) U: DTC U1313 CAN-LS MONITOR DATA ABNORMAL DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Center display unit error, or harness between the main harness splice and center display unit is open or shorted, the connector is not connected securely and the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 653 Is OK displayed? Go to step 2. Refer to MFD or 1) Display the current data of body integrated navigation display. unit using Subaru Select Monitor. <Ref. to ET-22, 2) Display center monitor display fail. REMOVAL, Navi- gation Display.> <Ref. to ET-28,...
Page 654 asieps_tobira.book 79 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) V: DTC U1321 CAN-LS METER NO-RECEIVE DATA DTC DETECTING CONDITION: Combination meter unit error, or harness between the main harness splice and combination meter unit is open or shorted, the connector is not connected properly and the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 655 Go to step 2. Perform the self- 1) Warm up the engine. diagnosis of com- 2) Compare the data of body integrated unit bination meter. and combination meter using Subaru Select <Ref. to IDI-4, Monitor. SELF-DIAGNO- Check item: SIS, INSPEC- •...
Page 656 asieps_tobira.book 81 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) W: DTC B1500 KEYLESS UART COM. MALFUNCTION DTC DETECTING CONDITION: UART between keyless control unit and body integrated unit is open or shorted, the connector is not con- nected properly, or the terminal has poor crimping.
Page 657 asieps_tobira.book 82 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 10 Go to step 2. Repair the open Ω? 1) Disconnect the body integrated unit connec- circuit of harness tor (i84) and keyless entry control module con- or replace har- nector (i96).
Page 658 83 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Diagnostic Table LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 13.General Diagnostic Table A: INSPECTION Read the DTC or inspect and diagnose the following data in the current data display using Subaru Select Monitor. 1. LAN SYSTEM Specifications Item Operation...
Page 659 asieps_tobira.book 84 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Diagnostic Table LAN SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. BODY INTEGRATED UNIT Specifications Item Operation Note Operate the illumination volume, Illumination light is Inspect the Illumination VR illumination light is controlled controlled with illumination — power supply according to the change of voltage changing of data.
Page 660 2007 B9 TRIBECA SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX WIRING SYSTEM SECTION WIRING SYSTEM This service manual has been prepared to provide SUBARU service personnel with the necessary information and data for the correct maintenance and repair of SUBARU vehicles. This manual includes the procedures...
Page 661 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分...
Page 662 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 WIRING SYSTEM Page Basic Diagnostic Procedure ...............3 Working Precautions ................14 Power Supply Circuit ................15 Ground Circuit ..................22 Engine Electrical System .................32 Vacuum Pump Control System ..............48 AT Control System ...................50 AT Shift Lock Control System ..............58 TPM Control System ................59 Vehicle Dynamics Control System ............60 Air Conditioning System ................64...
Page 663 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 WIRING SYSTEM Rear Defogger System ................136 Remote Control Mirror System ...............137 Combination Meter System ..............139 Speedmeter System ................143 Fuel Gauge System ................144 Coolant Temperature System ..............145 Oil Pressure Warning Light System ............146 Parking Brake / Brake Fluid Level Warning Light System ......147 Sunroof Control System .................148 Keyless Entry System ................149 Security System ..................153...
Page 664 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description LIGHTING SYSTEM 1. General Description A: SPECIFICATION Halogen type low beam 12 V — 55 W Headlight Halogen type high beam 12 V — 65 W Front turn signal, parking 12 V — 28/8 W Front side marker light 12 V —...
Page 665 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Headlight and Tail Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 2. Headlight and Tail Light Sys- 3. TAIL AND ILLUMINATION RELAY Connect terminal No. 4 to the battery positive termi- nal and terminal No. 3 to the battery ground termi- A: WIRING DIAGRAM nal, and measure the resistance between tail and illumination relay terminals.
Page 666 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Headlight and Tail Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 5. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY (TAIL) Connect terminal No. 3 to battery positive terminal and terminal No. 5 to battery ground terminal, and measure the daytime running light relay resistance between terminals.
Page 667 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Fog Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 3. Front Fog Light System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. FRONT FOG LIGHT <Ref. to WI-95, WIRING DIAGRAM, Front Fog Light System.> B: INSPECTION 1. FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH Measure the resistance between front fog light switch terminals.
Page 668 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Turn Signal Light and Hazard Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 4. Turn Signal Light and Hazard Light System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. TURN SIGNAL LIGHT AND HAZARD LIGHT <Ref. to WI-103, WIRING DIAGRAM, Turn Signal Light and Hazard Light System.> B: INSPECTION 1.
Page 669 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Back-up Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 5. Back-up Light System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. BACK-UP LIGHT <Ref. to WI-96, WIRING DIAGRAM, Back-up Light System.> B: INSPECTION 1. BACK-UP LIGHT RELAY Measure the resistance between headlight relay terminals when connecting terminal No. 4 to the battery positive terminal and terminal No.
Page 670 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Stop Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 6. Stop Light System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. STOP LIGHT <Ref. to WI-97, WIRING DIAGRAM, Stop Light System.> B: INSPECTION 1. STOP LIGHT SWITCH Measure the resistance between stop light switch terminals.
Page 671 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Room Light System LIGHTING SYSTEM 7. Room Light System 3. REAR GATE LIGHT SWITCH Measure the resistance between rear gate light A: WIRING DIAGRAM switch terminals. 1. ROOM LIGHT <Ref. to WI-105, WIRING DIAGRAM, Interior Light System.>...
Page 672 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Switch (Light) LIGHTING SYSTEM 8. Combination Switch (Light) C: INSPECTION Measure the resistance between combination A: REMOVAL switch terminals. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the screws and remove the steering column covers (upper and lower).
Page 673 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Base Switch Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 9. Combination Base Switch C: INSPECTION Assembly 1. COMBINATION BASE SWITCH ASSEM- A: REMOVAL Inspect the combination base switch assembly and 1) Remove the driver’s airbag module. <Ref. to AB- roll connector for cracks or deformation.
Page 674 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Headlight Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 10.Headlight Assembly 7) Disconnect the connector and then detach the rear headlight assembly. A: REMOVAL B: INSTALLATION 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2) Remove the air intake duct.
Page 675 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Headlight Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM LI-00453 Bulb center marking 3 m (10 ft) h mm (in) at 3 m (10 ft) 21 (0.83) LI-13...
Page 676 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Headlight Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 11.Headlight Bulb 6) Remove the light bulb retaining spring (A) to re- move bulb. A: REMOVAL 1. HIGH BEAM AND LOW BEAM CAUTION: • Because the halogen bulb operates at a high temperature, dirt and oil on the bulb surface re- duces the bulb’s service life.
Page 677 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Turn Signal Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 12.Front Turn Signal Light Bulb A: REMOVAL 1) Open the front hood. 2) Turn the socket (A) and remove the front turn signal light bulb. LI-00534 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. C: INSPECTION 1) Visually check the bulb for blow out.
Page 678 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Parking Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 13.Parking Light Bulb A: SPECIFICATION The parking light bulb is integrated into the front turn signal light bulb as a unit; therefore, refer to “Front Turn Signal Light Bulb” for the removal pro- cedure.
Page 679 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Side Marker Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 14.Front Side Marker Light Bulb A: REMOVAL 1) Open the front hood. 2) Turn the socket (A) and remove the front turn signal light bulb. LI-00508 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. C: INSPECTION 1) Visually check the bulb for blow out.
Page 680 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Fog Light Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 15.Front Fog Light Assembly • Check the area around the fog light for any scratches, damage or other type of deformation. A: REMOVAL • Make sure that the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Page 681 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Fog Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 16.Front Fog Light Bulb A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Disengage the three clips, and then turn over the lower mud guard. 3) Disconnect the harness connector. 4) Remove the back cover.
Page 682 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Side Turn Signal Light Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 17.Side Turn Signal Light As- sembly A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the mirror. <Ref. to GW-14, REPLACE- MENT, Outer Mirror.> 3) Remove the scalp cap. <Ref. to GW-12, RE- PLACEMENT, Scalp Cap.>...
Page 683 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Combination Light Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 18.Rear Combination Light As- sembly A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the cover. LI-00512 3) Remove the two bolts, and then detach the rear combination light by pulling it to the rear side of ve- hicle.
Page 684 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Tail/Stop Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 19.Tail/Stop Light Bulb A: REMOVAL 1. COMBINATION LIGHT 1) Remove the rear combination light assembly. <Ref. to LI-21, REMOVAL, Rear Combination Light Assembly.> 2) Turn the socket and remove the bulb. LI-00514 2.
Page 685 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 20.Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear combination light assembly. <Ref. to LI-21, REMOVAL, Rear Combination Light Assembly.> 2) Turn the socket and remove the bulb. LI-00515 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 686 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Side Marker Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 21.Rear Side Marker Light Bulb A: SPECIFICATION The rear side marker light bulb is integrated into the tail/stop light as a single unit; therefore, refer to the section on tail/stop light bulbs for the removal pro- cedures.
Page 687 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Finisher Light Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 22.Rear Finisher Light Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the bulb inspection cover of the rear gate trim. LI-00516 2) Disconnect the harness connector. 3) Remove the mounting nuts and detach the rear finisher assembly.
Page 688 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Back-up Light Bulb LIGHTING SYSTEM 23.Back-up Light Bulb A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the bulb inspection cover of the rear gate trim. 2) Turn the socket and remove the bulb. LI-00535 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. C: INSPECTION 1) Visually check the bulb for blow out.
Page 689 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 License Plate Light Assembly LIGHTING SYSTEM 24.License Plate Light Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear gate garnish. <Ref. to EI-52, REMOVAL, Rear Gate Garnish.> 2) Disengage the clips, and disconnect the connec- tors, and then detach the license light assembly. LI-00519 NOTE: If the model of the vehicle is one with rear view...
Page 690 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 License Plate Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 25.License Plate Light A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the license plate light mounting screw (A) and then remove the lens (B). LI-00520 2) Remove the bulb. B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. C: INSPECTION 1) Visually check the bulb for blow out.
Page 691 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 High-mounted Stop Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 26.High-mounted Stop Light A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Detach the roof spoiler. <Ref. to EI-31, REMOV- AL, Roof Spoiler.> 3) Remove the nuts (A), then detach the high- mounted stop light.
Page 692 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Spot Map Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 27.Spot Map Light B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL C: INSPECTION 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the lens. 1. SPOT MAP LIGHT BULB •...
Page 693 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Room Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 28.Room Light C: INSPECTION A: REMOVAL 1. ROOM LIGHT BULB 1) Visually check the bulb for blow out. 1. MODEL WITHOUT REAR ENTERTAIN- 2) Check the bulb specification. <Ref. to LI-2, MENT SYSTEM SPECIFICATION, General Description.>...
Page 694 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Luggage Room Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 29.Luggage Room Light A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the luggage room light body (A). LI-00258 3) Disconnect the harness connector and remove the lens. B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 695 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 30.Rear Gate Light C: INSPECTION A: REMOVAL 1. REAR GATE LIGHT BULB 1) Visually check the bulb for blow out. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Check the bulb specification. <Ref. to LI-2, 2) Remove the bulb inspection cover of rear gate SPECIFICATION, General Description.>...
Page 696 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Glove Box Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 31.Glove Box Light A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the glove box. <Ref. to EI-37, REMOV- AL, Glove Box.> 3) Disconnect the harness connector. 4) Remove the glove box light. LI-00525 B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 697 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Door Step Light LIGHTING SYSTEM 32.Door Step Light A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the front door trim or rear door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, REMOVAL, Door Trim.> 3) Disconnect the harness connector. 4) Remove the mounting screw from the rear side of trim and remove the door step light.
Page 698 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Ignition Switch Illumination LIGHTING SYSTEM 33.Ignition Switch Illumination A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the screws, and detach the upper col- umn cover and lower column cover. SL-00258 3) Disconnect the ignition switch illumination con- nector (A).
Page 699 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS Page General Description ...................2 Wiper and Washer System ................5 Combination Switch (Wiper) ...............6 Wiper Blade ....................10 Washer Tank and Motor ................12 Wiper Relay Unit ..................14 Front Wiper Arm ..................15 Front Wiper Motor and Link ..............16 Front Washer Nozzle ................17 Rear Wiper Arm ..................18 Rear Wiper Motor ..................19...
Page 700 Go to step 3. Go to “Airbag 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Warning Light Fail- 2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data ure”. <Ref. to link connector. AB(diag)-42, Air- 3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the bag Warning Light Subaru Select Monitor .
Page 701 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Check List for Interview OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 2. Check List for Interview A: CHECK Customer’s name Inspector’s name Date vehicle brought in Registration No. Odometer reading V.I.N. miles Date problem occurred Registration year Fine Cloudy Weather Rainy Snowy...
Page 702 <Ref. to OD(diag)-17, SYSTEM CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> 3) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity. Occupant detection system may be destroyed in- stantly. 4) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
Page 703 To measure the voltage and resistance of airbag system and occupant detection system compo- nents, be sure to use the specified test harness. 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 1B020XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting for the electrical sys- MONITOR KIT tem. ST1B020XU0 • TEST HARNESS D ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER...
Page 704 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS U ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299AG000 TEST HARNESS U Used when measuring voltage and resistance of airbag control module. ST98299AG000 OD(diag)-6...
Page 705 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 8 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 58 57 56 55 54 53 1 2 3...
Page 706 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS Y ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299AG040 TEST HARNESS Y Used for diagnosing a failure of the seat belt buckle switch. ST98299AG040 AB-01069 OD(diag)-8...
Page 707 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AB ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA000 TEST HARNESS Used when measuring voltage and resistance of occupant detection system. ST98299XA000 OD-00029 OD(diag)-9...
Page 708 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AE ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA030 TEST HARNESS TEST HARNESS Y ADAPTER HARNESS Used for diagnosing a failure of the seat belt buckle switch. ST98299XA030 OD-00026 OD(diag)-10...
Page 709 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AC ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA010 TEST HARNESS Used for diagnosing a failure of the seat belt ten- sion sensor. ST98299XA010 OD-00027 OD(diag)-11...
Page 710 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) • TEST HARNESS AD ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 98299XA020 TEST HARNESS Used when measuring voltage and resistance of seat belt tension sensor. ST98299XA020 OD-00028 2. GENERAL TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.
Page 711 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Electrical Component Location OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 4. Electrical Component Location A: LOCATION OD-00019 Occupant detection control mod- Airbag ON/OFF indicator light Seat belt tension sensor (Warning box) Occupant detection sensor Buckle switch (Passenger’s seat) OD-00016 OD-00015 OD-00018 OD-00017...
Page 712 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Connector OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 5. Airbag Connector A: PROCEDURE 1. BUCKLE SWITCH 1) How to disconnect: (1) Move the slide lock (A) in the direction of ar- row. (2) While holding the slide lock (A) in moved po- sition, disconnect the connector.
Page 713 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Control Module I/O Signal OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 6. Control Module I/O Signal A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION CAUTION: Never remove the occupant detection control module, occupant detection sensor or seat frame be- cause they are integrated into one unit. Terminal Terminal Name Input/Output value...
Page 714 Refer to the DTC readout of the airbag system (diagnosis). <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, READ DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> NOTE: • For details concerning operation procedure, refer to the “SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL”. • For details concerning DTCs, refer to the “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (Airbag system, Occupant de- tection system).”...
Page 715 • Check that the passengers seat belt is not insert- screen, select the [OK]. ed into the buckle, not tense or not stuck. 5) When Done is displayed, close the Subaru Se- • Check that ambient temperature is in a range lect Monitor.
Page 716 DTC of airbag system, and perform the diagnosis referring to “List of Diag- nostic Trouble Code.” <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, OPER- ATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> <Ref. to AB(diag)- 47, LIST, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).> B: INSPECTION 1.
Page 717 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 8. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: OPERATION For details about reading of DTCs, refer to “Airbag System (Diagnosis) Subaru Select Monitor”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-32, Subaru Select Monitor.> OD(diag)-19...
Page 718 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Inspection Mode OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 9. Inspection Mode A: PROCEDURE Recreate the circumstance by referring to the con- ditions described in the checklist. OD(diag)-20...
Page 719 OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 10.Clear Memory Mode A: OPERATION Clear the memory in the following steps after the malfunction is repaired. For details to clear DTC, refer to “Airbag System (Diagnosis) Subaru Select Monitor”. <Ref. to AB(di- ag)-32, Subaru Select Monitor.> OD(diag)-21...
Page 720 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 11.Airbag Warning Light Illumi- nation Pattern A: INSPECTION Turn the ignition switch to ON, and confirm that the airbag warning light remains on for approx. 6 sec- onds then go off afterwards.
Page 721 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Passenger’s Airbag ON/OFF Indicator Light Illumination Pattern OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 12.Passenger’s Airbag ON/OFF Indicator Light Illumination Pattern A: INSPECTION (12) (13) (11) (10) (10) OD-00010 Passenger’s airbag ON indicator Ignition switch Adult light Light OFF (10) Passenger’s airbag OFF indicator Light ON...
Page 722 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) 13.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) A: LIST Display Content of diagnosis Reference target ODS Calibration Error System calibration (Rezeroing) was not completed <Ref. to OD(diag)-25, normally.
Page 723 <Ref. to SE-10, PASSENGER’S SEAT, DISAS- SEMBLY, Front Seat.> 3) Connect the ground cable to battery. 4) Connect Subaru Select Monitor to the vehi- cle and perform the system calibration. <Ref. to OD(diag)-17, SYSTEM CALIBRATION (REZE- ROING), OPERATION, Subaru Select Moni- tor.>...
Page 724 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) C: DTC 2C BELT TENSION SENSOR FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Passenger’s seat belt tension sensor is faulty. • Airbag main harness circuit is open or shorted. •...
Page 725 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) Step Check CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNEC- Is there poor contact? Reconnect the Go to step 2. TORS. connector. If the Check for poor contact of the connectors fault is not fixed, between the occupant detection control module replace the airbag...
Page 726 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) E: DTC 29 ODS FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Occupant detection sensor is faulty. • Occupant detection control module is faulty. • Occupant detection harness is faulty. •...
Page 727 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) F: DTC 37 BUCKLE SWITCH RH FAILURE DTC DETECTING CONDITION: • Passenger’s seat buckle switch circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. • Seat harness circuit is open, shorted or shorted to ground. •...
Page 728 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM (DIAGNOSTICS) OD(diag)-30...
Page 729 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 SEAT BELT SYSTEM Page General Description ...................2 Pretensioner Connector ................6 Inspection Locations After a Collision ............7 Seat Belt Warning System .................8 Front Seat Belt ..................10 Second Seat belt ..................12 Third Seat belt ..................14...
Page 730 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEAT BELT SYSTEM 1. General Description A: COMPONENT 1. FRONT SEAT BELT SB-00303 Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Adjustable anchor ASSY Center pillar upper trim T1: 30 (3.1, 22) Shoulder anchor Inner seat belt ASSY T2: 38 (3.9, 28) Outer seat belt ASSY Belt tension sensor (passenger’s...
Page 731 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEAT BELT SYSTEM 2. SECOND SEAT BELT SB-00304 Outer seat belt RH ASSY Inner seat belt RH ASSY Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Shoulder seat belt center ASSY Shoulder seat belt center buckle T1: 30 (3.1, 22) ASSY T2: 38 (3.9, 28) Outer seat belt LH ASSY...
Page 732 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEAT BELT SYSTEM 3. THIRD SEAT BELT SB-00305 Outer seat belt RH ASSY Inner seat belt LH ASSY Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Outer seat belt LH ASSY T1: 30 (3.1, 22) T2: 38 (3.9, 28) Inner seat belt RH ASSY SB-4...
Page 733 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEAT BELT SYSTEM B: CAUTION • Before starting the work, turn the ignition switch to OFF, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait for 20 seconds or more. • The pretensioner system has a backup power source.
Page 734 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Pretensioner Connector SEAT BELT SYSTEM 2. Pretensioner Connector A: PROCEDURE Refer to airbag connectors in the airbag section. <Ref. to AB-8, PROCEDURE, Airbag Connector.> SB-6...
Page 735 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Inspection Locations After a Collision SEAT BELT SYSTEM 3. Inspection Locations After a Collision A: INSPECTION Check for the following, and replace with new parts if necessary. • Center pillar lower trim is discolored or cracked. •...
Page 736 CHECK THE BODY INTEGRATED UNIT. Go to step 3. Go to step 7. Is the seat belt switch display 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data OFF? link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.(engine OFF) 3) Run the Subaru Select Monitor.
Page 737 ABS or VDC warning may light, but this does not indicate a malfunction. When diagnosis is complete, perform clear memory for VDC. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-15, OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM. Does the seat belt warning light Go to step 19.
Page 738 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Seat Belt SEAT BELT SYSTEM 5. Front Seat Belt 7) On the passenger side, disconnect connector of the belt tension sensor. A: REMOVAL 1. OUTER SEAT BELT ASSEMBLY 1) Fold the backrest all the way forward, and then move the front seat all the way forward.
Page 739 • After the driver’s and passenger’s inner seat belt assembly installation, check that the seat belt buckle switch operates normally using the Subaru Select Monitor in {Status Data} of “Air- bag System”. <Ref. to AB(diag)-33, DISPLAY SB-00318 OF STATUS INFORMATION, OPERATION, Sub- Tightening torque: aru Select Monitor.>Improper buckle switch op-...
Page 740 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second Seat belt SEAT BELT SYSTEM 6. Second Seat belt 3) Remove the clips, and then lower the roof trim end. A: REMOVAL 1. OUTER SEAT BELT RH ASSEMBLY AND LH ASSEMBLY 1) Remove the second-row seats. <Ref. to SE-13, LH&CTR SEAT, REMOVAL, Second-Row Seats.>...
Page 741 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second Seat belt SEAT BELT SYSTEM 4. SHOULDER SEAT BELT CENTER BUCKLE 1) Remove the LH second-row seat assembly. <Ref. to SE-13, LH&CTR SEAT, REMOVAL, Sec- ond-Row Seats.> 2) Remove the RH hinge outer cover. 3) Remove the bolt, and then remove the shoulder seat belt center buckle.
Page 742 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Third Seat belt SEAT BELT SYSTEM 7. Third Seat belt A: REMOVAL 1. OUTER SEAT BELT RH ASSEMBLY AND LH ASSEMBLY 1) Remove the third-row seats. <Ref. to SE-18, REMOVAL, Third-Row Seats.> 2) Remove the rear quarter trim. <Ref. to EI-45, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.>...
Page 743 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page General Description ...................2 Headlight and Tail Light System ..............3 Front Fog Light System ................5 Turn Signal Light and Hazard Light System ..........6 Back-up Light System ................7 Stop Light System ..................8 Room Light System ..................9 Combination Switch (Light) ..............10 Combination Base Switch Assembly ............11 Headlight Assembly .................12...
Page 744 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEATS 1. General Description A: COMPONENT 1. FRONT SEAT (DRIVER’S SEAT) (23) (11) (10) (12) (22) (13) (18) (14) (17) (25) (19) (21) (16) (26) (20) (15) (24) (24) SE-00691 Backrest cover (13) Seat cushion pad (24) Slide rail cover Backrest pad...
Page 745 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEATS 2. FRONT SEAT (PASSENGER’S SEAT) (10) (12) (13) (20) (11) (15) (16) (14) (17) (19) (18) (21) SE-00581 Backrest cover (11) Rear leg cover inside (19) Power seat switch unit Backrest pad (12) Seat cushion cover (20) Inner seat belt ASSY...
Page 746 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEATS 3. SECOND-ROW SEATS (12) (11) (11) (12) (10) (11) (12) (15) (13) (12) (14) (11) (12) (11) (15) (15) SE-00582 Headrest Backrest back cover (14) Armrest Headrest lock bushing Holder (15) Slide rail cover Backrest cover (10) Seat backrest latch cover...
Page 747 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SEATS 4. THIRD-ROW SEATS (11) (10) SE-00583 Headrest Backrest pad Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Headrest lock bushing Seat cushion cover T1: 10 (1.01, 7.23) T2: 52 (5.30, 37.6) Hinge lever ASSY Seat cushion pad T3: 53 (5.40 38.3) Backrest back cover (10)
Page 748 • If the seat cushion cover is removed or replaced, make sure to perform passenger detection system adjustment after installing the seat to the vehicle. <Ref. to OD(diag)-17, SYSTEM CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERATION, Subaru Select Mon- itor.> Failure to do so may cause improper operation of the passenger detection system.
Page 749 2 bolts at the front side CAUTION: of the slide rail. After installing the driver’s seat, use the Subaru 5) Disconnect the ground cable from battery, and Select Monitor to confirm that the seat position wait for more than 20 seconds before starting work.
Page 750 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Seat SEATS C: DISASSEMBLY 6) Remove the screw (A) and clip (B), and then re- move the seat side cover inside. 1. DRIVER’S SEAT 1) Remove the seat from vehicle. <Ref. to SE-7, DRIVER’S SEAT, REMOVAL, Front Seat.> 2) Remove the clip (A) and straps (B) on the back of seat cushion.
Page 751 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Seat SEATS 9) Remove the lock clip, and then remove the lum- 13) Remove the cover frame (A). ber support lever. SE-00337 SE-00414 14) Pull out the backrest frame assembly. 10) Remove the hooks and hog rings at the rear 15) Remove the side airbag module.
Page 752 <Ref. to OD(diag)-17, SYSTEM CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> Failure to do so may cause improper activation of passenger’s airbag. • The passenger detection system (passenger seat only) control unit, passenger detection...
Page 753 CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERATION, attachment nuts for the side airbag module as- Subaru Select Monitor.> sembly. Failure to do so may cause improper activation • Always use new hog rings. of passenger’s airbag.
Page 754 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Seat SEATS 4) Temporarily tighten the reclining hinge bolts in the order of (1) through (4), to an extent that the seat backrest assembly is not locked. SE-00538 (A) Vehicle inside (B) Vehicle outside 5) Hold the seat cushion assembly securely, and tighten the reclining hinge bolts in the order de- scribed above until they reach the specified torque.
Page 755 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second-Row Seats SEATS 3. Second-Row Seats C: DISASSEMBLY A: REMOVAL 1. LH SEAT 1) Remove the seat from vehicle. <Ref. to SE-13, 1. LH&CTR SEAT LH&CTR SEAT, REMOVAL, Second-Row Seats.> 1) Tilt the backrest forward, and move the seat for- 2) Remove the headrest.
Page 756 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second-Row Seats SEATS 7) Remove the stopper. 13) Remove the hog rings (A) of backrest, and then remove the backrest cover from backrest. SE-00602 : (A) SE-00606 8) Remove the hog rings (A) and hooks at the rear face of the backrest.
Page 757 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second-Row Seats SEATS 2. CTR SEAT 10) Remove the hog rings (A) on the front face of the backrest, and then remove the backrest cover 1) Remove the seat from vehicle. <Ref. to SE-13, from the backrest. LH&CTR SEAT, REMOVAL, Second-Row Seats.>...
Page 758 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second-Row Seats SEATS 6) Remove the two screws securing the holder. 11) Remove the reclining lever cover. SE-00614 SE-00618 7) Disconnect the wire connected to the holder, 12) Remove the headrest lock bushing. then remove the holder. NOTE: Push outward from inside of the seat to remove.
Page 759 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Second-Row Seats SEATS 17) Remove the seat cushion hog rings (A), and 4) Use the reclining lever to place the backrest in then remove the seat cushion cover from seat the most upright position, and check the first lock cushion.
Page 760 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Third-Row Seats SEATS 4. Third-Row Seats 4) Remove the hog rings (A) on the rear side of seat cushion. A: REMOVAL 1) Lift up the front side of the 3rd seat cushion and then remove the hooks. 2) Lift up the 3rd seat cushion and remove the seat cushion by pushing it backward to detach the hook.
Page 761 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Third-Row Seats SEATS D: ASSEMBLY 9) Remove the hog rings (A) and hooks at the rear face of the backrest. CAUTION: • Be careful not to stain or damage the back- rest cover during assembly. • Always use new hog rings. •...
Page 762 <Ref. to OD(diag)-17, SYSTEM 3) Check the auto air conditioner control module. CALIBRATION (REZEROING), OPERATION, <Ref. to AC(diag)-8, Auto A/C Control Module I/O Subaru Select Monitor.> Signal.> Failure to do so may cause improper activation of passenger’s airbag. SE-20...
Page 763 asieps_tobira.book 21 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 6. Power Seat System B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL NOTE: CAUTION: • For the memory-equipped seat, always perform When it is necessary to remove the front seat, the initialize operation after the installation.
Page 764 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 3. CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH • Driver’s seat (memory-equipped) Move each switch and measure the resistance be- Symptom Criteria tween connector terminals. Does not operate by manual • Driver’s seat (without memory) operation.
Page 765 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 4. CHECK MEMORY SWITCH (MEMORY- • Passenger’s seat EQUPPED) Move each switch and measure the resistance be- tween connector terminals. 14 13 8 7 6 5 4 3 SE-00682 Switch position Terminal No. Standard 7 and 13 Less than 10 Ω...
Page 766 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 6. SOME OF THE MOTOR DO NOT OPERATE. (DRIVER’S SEAT, WITHOUT MEMORY) • Malfunction of slide operation Step Check CHECK SWITCH. Go to step 2. Is there any problem on the Replace the power 1) Disconnect the connector of power seat inspection result? seat switch assem-...
Page 767 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS • Malfunction of lifter operation Step Check CHECK SWITCH. Is there any problem on the Go to step 2. Replace the power 1) Disconnect the connector of power seat inspection result? seat switch assem- switch assembly.
Page 768 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 7. DOES NOT OPERATE IN MANUAL OPERATION (DRIVER’S SEAT, MEMORY-EQUIPPED) Step Check CHECK SEAT FUNCTION. Does all function fails to oper- Go to step 2. Check the motor Operate each power seat switch and check that ate? which does not each power seat function operates normally.
Page 769 asieps_tobira.book 27 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 8. SOME OF THE MOTOR DO NOT OPERATE. (DRIVER’S SEAT, WITH MEMORY) • Malfunction of slide operation Step Check CHECK OPERATION. Go to step 2. Does the motor rotate for one Encoder defec- Check the slide motor rotation while moving the seconds or more when operat- tion.
Page 770 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS • Malfunction of tilt operation Step Check CHECK OPERATION. Does the motor rotate for one Go to step 2. Encoder defec- Check the tilt motor rotation while moving the seconds or more when operat- tion.
Page 771 asieps_tobira.book 29 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS • Malfunction of lifter operation Step Check CHECK OPERATION. Does the motor rotate for one Go to step 2. Encoder defec- Check the lifter motor rotation while turning the seconds or more when operat- tion.
Page 772 asieps_tobira.book 30 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS • Malfunction of reclining operation Step Check CHECK OPERATION. Does the motor rotate for one Go to step 2. Encoder defec- Check the reclining motor rotation while moving seconds or more when operat- tion.
Page 773 asieps_tobira.book 31 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 9. FAILS TO STORE THE LOCATION TO THE MEMORY (DRIVER’S SEAT, WITH MEMORY) Step Check CHECK SWITCH. Is there any problem on the Go to step 2. Replace the mem- 1) Disconnect the harness connector of mem- inspection result? ory switch assem- ory switch assembly.
Page 774 asieps_tobira.book 32 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 10.FAILS TO PERFORM THE RESTORING OPERATION (DRIVER’S SEAT, WITH MEMORY) Step Check CHECK MEMORY FUNCTION. Is the seat position correctly Go to step 2. <Ref. to SE-31, Perform the memory operation of the seat posi- memorized? FAILS TO STORE tion.
Page 775 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS 12.ALL FUNCTION FAILS TO OPERATE. (PASSENGER’S SEAT) Step Check CHECK SEAT FUNCTION. Does all function fails to oper- Go to step 2. Check the motor Operate each power seat switch and check that ate? which does not each power seat function operates normally.
Page 776 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Power Seat System SEATS • Malfunction of reclining operation Step Check CHECK SWITCH. Is there any problem on the Go to step 2. Replace the power 1) Disconnect the connector of power seat inspection result? seat switch assem- switch assembly.
Page 777 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 SECURITY AND LOCKS Page General Description ...................2 Door Lock Control System .................8 Keyless Entry System ................11 Security System ..................25 Front Inner Remote ..................33 Front Outer Handle ..................34 Front Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly .......35 Front Door Lock Actuator .................36 Rear Inner Remote ...................37 Rear Outer Handle ...................38...
Page 778 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SECURITY AND LOCKS 1. General Description A: COMPONENT 1. DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY SL-00541 Front Rear Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Inner remote ASSY Rear door latch and door lock actuator ASSY T1: 6.5 (0.66, 4.8) Front door latch and door lock actuator ASSY T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
Page 779 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. REAR GATE LOCK SL-00437 Rear gate actuator Striker Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Rear gate latch T1: 18 (1.8, 13.3) T2: 25 (2.5, 18.4) SL-3...
Page 780 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. FRONT HOOD LOCK AND REMOTE OPENERS SL-00438 Fuel lid Hood Tightening torque: N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Front hood lock ASSY Pull handle ASSY T1: 33.0 (3.36, 24.3) Cable ASSY, front hood Hood operation lever T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5) Cable ASSY, fuel...
Page 781 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM SL-00439 Antenna Body integrated unit Transponder Security indicator light (LED bulb) SL-5...
Page 782 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM SL-00440 Keyless entry control module Door switch Horn Rear gate latch switch Body integrated unit Keyless buzzer B: CAUTION • Before disassembling or reassembling parts, al- ways disconnect the battery ground cable from bat- tery.
Page 783 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SECURITY AND LOCKS C: PREPARATION TOOL 1. SPECIAL TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 925580000 PULLER Used for removing trim clip. ST-925580000 2. GENERAL TOOL TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage. Drill Used for replacing ignition key lock.
Page 784 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Door Lock Control System SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. Door Lock Control System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. DOOR LOCK CONTROL <Ref. to WI-149, WIRING DIAGRAM, Keyless Entry System.> B: INSPECTION 1. SYMPTOM CHART Symptom Repair order Reference The door lock control system 1.
Page 785 OK. integrated unit using Subaru Select Monitor. switch is moved to LOCK/ 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data UNLOCK? link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu.
Page 786 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Door Lock Control System SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR & CIRCUIT Step Check CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Replace the body Measure the voltage between the harness con- integrated unit.
Page 787 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 3. Keyless Entry System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. KEYLESS ENTRY <Ref. to WI-149, WIRING DIAGRAM, Keyless Entry System.> B: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 1. KEYLESS ENTRY CONTROL MODULE 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 SL-00228 Description...
Page 788 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 2. BODY INTEGRATED UNIT side side B281 side B280 16 15 13 12 14 13 CS-00273 Description Terminal No. Measuring condition Ignition switch (ON) A1 (INPUT) Battery voltage is present when ignition switch is turned ON. Keyless buzzer A6 (OUTPUT) 12 V is present when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button of transmitter.
Page 789 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS C: INSPECTION 1. SYMPTOM CHART Symptom Repair order Reference None of the functions of keyless entry 1. Check the transmitter battery. <Ref. to SL-15, CHECK TRANSMIT- system operate. TER BATTERY AND FUNCTION, INSPECTION, Keyless Entry Sys- tem.>...
Page 790 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS Symptom Repair order Reference The panic alarm does not operate. 1. Check the keyless transmitter battery and func- <Ref. to SL-15, CHECK TRANSMIT- tion. TER BATTERY AND FUNCTION, INSPECTION, Keyless Entry Sys- tem.>...
Page 791 <Ref. to SL-52, REGISTRATION OF KEYLESS TRANSMITTER WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR, REPLACEMENT, Trans- mitter.> 1) Close all the doors and rear gate of inspec- tion target vehicle.
Page 792 Go to step 2. Keyless entry con- (DTC). com. Malfunction” displayed? trol module is nor- 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data mal. link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu.
Page 793 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 6. CHECK DOOR SWITCH Step Check CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT. Is the voltage 0 V when each Go to step 2. Go to step 3. Measure the voltage between the body inte- door or rear gate is opened? grated unit harness connector terminal and chassis ground.
Page 794 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. CHECK KEY WARNING SWITCH Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse Go to step 2. Remove and visually check the fuse No. 14 (in with a new one.
Page 795 2) Disconnect the key warning switch harness LOCK/UNLOCK button? <Ref. to connector. LAN(diag)-2, Basic 3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data Diagnostic Proce- link connector. dure.> 4) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 5) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu.
Page 796 <Ref. to 2) Disconnect the key warning switch harness LAN(diag)-2, Basic connector. Diagnostic Proce- 3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data dure.> link connector. 4) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 5) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu. 6) Select the {Current Data Display & Save}.
Page 797 Subaru Select Moni- switch is moved to LOCK/ tor. UNLOCK? 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu. 4) Select the {Current Data Display & Save}.
Page 798 asieps_tobira.book 22 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 12.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION Step Check CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse Go to step 2. Remove and visually check the fuse No. 14 (in with a new one. the main fuse box).
Page 799 asieps_tobira.book 23 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 14.CHECK KEYLESS BUZZER Step Check CHECK KEYLESS BUZZER OPERATION. Does the keyless buzzer Keyless buzzer is Go to step 2. Check that the keyless buzzer sounds when sound? normal. LOCK or OPEN button of keyless remote con- trol key is pressed.
Page 800 asieps_tobira.book 24 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry System SECURITY AND LOCKS 15.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH Step Check CHECK FUSIBLE LINK. Is the fusible link blown out? Replace the fusible Go to step 2. Remove the fusible link main SBF and SBF-6 link main SBF or (in main fuse box), and visually check.
Page 801 asieps_tobira.book 25 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Security System SECURITY AND LOCKS 4. Security System A: WIRING DIAGRAM <Ref. to WI-153, WIRING DIAGRAM, Security System.> B: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION side side B281 side B280 16 15 13 12 14 13 CS-00273 Description Terminal No. Measuring condition Ignition switch A1 (INPUT)
Page 802 asieps_tobira.book 26 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Security System SECURITY AND LOCKS C: INSPECTION 1. BASIC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Step Check INITIAL CHECK. Go to step 2. Does the keyless entry system Check keyless Check keyless entry system. operate normally? entry system. <Ref. to SL-13, INSPECTION, Keyless Entry Sys- tem.>...
Page 803 “ON”. • Siren YES/NO setting The {Siren YES/NO} setting of the item {Unit customization} of the Subaru Select Monitor always shall be set to “NO”. If it is set to “YES”, the horn of the security alarm will not sound.
Page 804 asieps_tobira.book 28 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Security System SECURITY AND LOCKS NOTE: Check the function setting of body integrated unit if any of the following symptoms appear. <Ref. to LAN(di- ag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> • The horn does not sound even when the security system operates. •...
Page 805 Check CHECK INPUT FROM EACH DOOR SWITCH Is the input signal detected The door switch When the input sig- 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data when opening the each door circuit is OK. nal cannot be link connector.
Page 806 Go to step 2. LATCH SWITCH. when opening the rear gate? switch circuit is 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu. 4) Select the {Current Data Display & Save}.
Page 807 CHECK OUTPUT TO HORN RELAY. Does the horn sound? Horn circuit is OK. Go to step 3. 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu.
Page 808 2) Disconnect the key warning switch harness LOCK/UNLOCK button? <Ref. to connector. LAN(diag)-2, Basic 3) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data Diagnostic Proce- link connector. dure.> 4) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 5) Select {Integ. unit} from main menu.
Page 809 asieps_tobira.book 33 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Inner Remote SECURITY AND LOCKS 5. Front Inner Remote A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, REMOV- AL, Door Trim.> 2) Remove the cable from the cable holder. 3) Remove the screw, move the inner remote to the rear, and remove from the panel.
Page 810 asieps_tobira.book 34 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Outer Handle SECURITY AND LOCKS 6. Front Outer Handle A: REMOVAL 1) Raise the front door glass to the top position. 2) Remove the door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, REMOV- AL, Door Trim.> 3) Remove the sealing cover. <Ref. to EB-18, RE- MOVAL, Front Sealing Cover.>...
Page 811 asieps_tobira.book 35 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly SECURITY AND LOCKS 7. Front Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Raise the front door glass to the top position. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 3) Remove the front door trim.
Page 812 asieps_tobira.book 36 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Door Lock Actuator SECURITY AND LOCKS 8. Front Door Lock Actuator A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the front door latch and door lock actu- ator assembly. <Ref. to SL-35, REMOVAL, Front Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly.> 2) Remove the pawl of front door latch security cov- er, and then remove the cover.
Page 813 asieps_tobira.book 37 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Inner Remote SECURITY AND LOCKS 9. Rear Inner Remote A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.> 2) Remove the screw, slide the inner remote to the rear, and remove from the panel. 3) Remove the cable (1).
Page 814 asieps_tobira.book 38 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Outer Handle SECURITY AND LOCKS 10.Rear Outer Handle A: REMOVAL 1) Raise the rear door glass to the top position. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 3) Remove the rear door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- MOVAL, Door Trim.>...
Page 815 asieps_tobira.book 39 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly SECURITY AND LOCKS 11.Rear Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Raise the door glass to the top position. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 3) Remove the rear door trim.
Page 816 asieps_tobira.book 40 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Door Lock Actuator SECURITY AND LOCKS 12.Rear Door Lock Actuator A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear door latch and door lock actu- ator assembly. <Ref. to SL-39, REMOVAL, Rear Door Latch and Door Lock Actuator Assembly.> 2) Remove the pawl of rear door latch security cov- er, and then remove the cover.
Page 817 asieps_tobira.book 41 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Release Switch SECURITY AND LOCKS 13.Rear Gate Release Switch A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the rear gate trim. <Ref. to EI-51, RE- MOVAL, Rear Gate Trim.> 2) Remove the rear gate garnish. <Ref. to EI-52, REMOVAL, Rear Gate Garnish.>...
Page 818 asieps_tobira.book 42 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Gate Latch Assembly SECURITY AND LOCKS 14.Rear Gate Latch Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear gate trim. <Ref. to EI-51, RE- MOVAL, Rear Gate Trim.> 3) Disconnect the harness connector of rear gate latch assembly.
Page 819 asieps_tobira.book 43 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Hood Lock Assembly SECURITY AND LOCKS 15.Front Hood Lock Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Open the front hood. 2) Remove the engine front cover. 3) Remove the bolts, and then detach the front hood lock assembly. SL-00450 4) Remove the cable from lock assembly.
Page 820 asieps_tobira.book 44 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Remote Openers SECURITY AND LOCKS 16.Remote Openers 7) Remove the bolt and nut, and then detach the pull handle assembly. A: REMOVAL 1. FRONT HOOD OPENER 1) Remove the nuts, and remove the front hood opener lever. 2) Remove the cable from the front hood opener.
Page 821 asieps_tobira.book 45 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Ignition Key Lock SECURITY AND LOCKS 17.Ignition Key Lock B: INSPECTION 1) Remove the instrument panel lower cover. A: REPLACEMENT 2) Remove the lower column cover. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 3) Unfasten the fixing clip which secures harness, 2) Remove the steering column.
Page 822 asieps_tobira.book 46 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Key Lock Cylinders SECURITY AND LOCKS 18.Key Lock Cylinders A: REPLACEMENT 1) Raise the front door glass to the top position. 2) Remove the door trim. <Ref. to EI-35, REMOV- AL, Door Trim.> 3) Remove the sealing cover. 4) Remove the plug at the rear end of the panel.
Page 823 asieps_tobira.book 47 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Security Control Unit SECURITY AND LOCKS 19.Security Control Unit A: NOTE The control of security system is carried out in body integrated unit. B: REMOVAL <Ref. to SL-51, REMOVAL, Body Integrated Unit.> C: INSTALLATION <Ref. to SL-51, INSTALLATION, Body Integrated Unit.>...
Page 824 4) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2. IMPACT SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT 5) Install the impact sensor. 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link 6) Connect the battery ground cable to the battery. connector. 7) Change the setting of impact sensor using Sub- 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Page 825 asieps_tobira.book 49 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Entry Control Module SECURITY AND LOCKS 21.Keyless Entry Control Mod- A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the glove box. <Ref. to EI-37, REMOV- AL, Glove Box.> 3) Remove the nut, then disconnect the connector to remove the keyless entry control module.
Page 826 asieps_tobira.book 50 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Keyless Buzzer SECURITY AND LOCKS 22.Keyless Buzzer A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the keyless buzzer installed to the backside of radiator bracket. B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. C: INSPECTION Install the keyless buzzer to another vehicle which operates keyless buzzer normally, check the buzz-...
Page 827 • Make sure that there are no differences from the contents of the current settings after installation. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-18, CONFIRMATION OF CUR- RENT SETTING, OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.> SL-51...
Page 828 Press the [Enter] key. NOTE: Select the [ ] on the Subaru Select Monitor to in- crease the number, and the [ ] to decrease. Se- SL-00387 lect the [<] to move to the digit in the left, and [>] to...
Page 829 asieps_tobira.book 53 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Immobilizer Control Module SECURITY AND LOCKS 25.Immobilizer Control Module A: NOTE The control of immobilizer system is carried out in body integrated unit. B: REMOVAL <Ref. to SL-51, REMOVAL, Body Integrated Unit.> C: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. SL-53...
Page 830 asieps_tobira.book 54 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Immobilizer Antenna SECURITY AND LOCKS 26.Immobilizer Antenna A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the screws, and detach the upper col- umn cover and lower column cover. SL-00258 3) Remove the instrument panel lower cover. <Ref. to EI-36, REMOVAL, Instrument Panel Lower Cov- er.>...
Page 831 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) Page General Description ...................2 Sunroof Control System ................4 Glass Lid ....................5 Sunroof Assembly ..................6 Sunroof Motor ....................7 Sunroof Switch ...................9 Sunshade ....................10...
Page 832 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 1. General Description A: COMPONENT SR-00125 Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Glass lid Drain tube T1: 4.5 (0.46, 3.3) Weather strip Motor ASSY T2: 6.0 (0.61, 4.4) Cover Frame ASSY Sunshade Deflector SR-2...
Page 833 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) B: CAUTION • Before disassembling or reassembling parts, al- ways disconnect the battery ground cable from bat- tery. When replacing the audio, control unit, and other parts provided with memory functions, record the memory contents before disconnecting the bat- tery ground cable in order to prevent memory dele- tion.
Page 834 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunroof Control System SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 2. Sunroof Control System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. SUNROOF <Ref. to WI-148, WIRING DIAGRAM, Sunroof Control System.> B: INSPECTION Symptom Inspection order Water leakage 1. Check roof panel and glass lid for improper or poor sealing. 2.
Page 835 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Glass Lid SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 3. Glass Lid Difference in height between glass lid and roof panel L: A: REMOVAL ± ± 1.0 mm (0.079 0.039 in) 1) Completely close the glass lid, and then open the sunshade.
Page 836 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunroof Assembly SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 4. Sunroof Assembly A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the roof trim. <Ref. to EI-50, REMOV- AL, Roof Trim.> 3) Disconnect the harness connector of sunroof motor.
Page 837 asieps_tobira.book 7 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunroof Motor SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 5. Sunroof Motor A: REMOVAL CAUTION: • When removing the clip, use great care not to damage the roof trim. • Never rotate the sunroof motor after remov- ing it. 1) Completely close the glass lid. 2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
Page 838 asieps_tobira.book 8 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunroof Motor SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) B: INSTALLATION 5) Check the operation of sunroof with following ta- ble. CAUTION: Operation Switch position When installing the motor assembly, be careful not to move the sunroof cable. (1) Glass lid closes completely. Close 1) Align the coulisse assembly and link assembly in (2) Glass lid tilt up to the top position.
Page 839 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunroof Switch SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 6. Sunroof Switch A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the spot map light lens (A) and sunroof switch mounting screws (B). LI-00521 LI-00522 3) Disconnect the harness connector, and then re- move the sunroof switch.
Page 840 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Sunshade SUNROOF/T-TOP/CONVERTIBLE TOP (SUNROOF) 7. Sunshade B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL C: INSPECTION 1) Remove the glass lid. <Ref. to SR-5, REMOV- AL, Glass Lid.> 1. CHECK FOR MOVING LOAD OF SUN- ®...
Page 841 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 EXTERIOR/INTERIOR TRIM Page General Description ...................2 Front Under Cover ...................17 Fuel Tank Protector ..................18 Mud Guard ....................19 Front Grille ....................20 Front Bumper ...................21 Rear Bumper ....................28 Cowl Panel ....................30 Roof Spoiler .....................31 Side Garnish ....................32 Roof Molding ....................34 Door Trim ....................35 Instrument Panel Lower Cover ..............36 Glove Box ....................37...
Page 842 asieps_tobira.book 2 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 1. General Description A: SPECIFICATION Front wiper motor Input 12 V — 72 W or less Rear wiper motor Input 12 V — 42 W or less Pump type Centrifugal Front washer motor Input 12 V —...
Page 843 asieps_tobira.book 3 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 2. REAR WIPER WW-00424 Wiper rubber Wiper arm cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Wiper blade ASSY T1: 7.0 (0.71, 5.2) T2: 8.0 (0.82, 5.9) Wiper arm Wiper motor ASSY WW-3...
Page 844 asieps_tobira.book 4 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 General Description WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 3. WASHER TANK WW-00425 Washer nozzle Front washer motor Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb) Washer hose Grommet T: 6.0 (0.61, 4.4) Washer tank Washer motor cover Washer tank cap Washer fluid level indicator sensor ASSY Rear washer motor C: CAUTION...
Page 845 asieps_tobira.book 5 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Wiper and Washer System WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 2. Wiper and Washer System A: WIRING DIAGRAM 1. WIPER AND WASHER (FRONT) <Ref. to WI-111, WIRING DIAGRAM, Front Wiper and Washer System.> 2. WIPER AND WASHER (REAR) <Ref.
Page 846 asieps_tobira.book 6 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Switch (Wiper) WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 3. Combination Switch (Wiper) B: INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. A: REMOVAL C: INSPECTION 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the driver’s airbag module. <Ref. to AB- 1.
Page 847 Position the front wiper switch to INT, then mea- input signal using the Subaru Select Monitor. sure the intermittent stationary time at each ve- (1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data hicle speed. link connector. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Page 848 Check the rear Check the input from body integrated unit using wiper switch. <Ref. the Subaru Select Monitor. to WW-6, INSPEC- 1) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data TION, Combina- link connector. tion Switch 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Page 849 asieps_tobira.book 9 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Combination Switch (Wiper) WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 2) Check rear wiper motor circuit Step Check CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF THE Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. • Check the fuse REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Page 850 asieps_tobira.book 10 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Wiper Blade WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 4. Wiper Blade 2. REAR Turn the blade in the direction of arrow (A) and re- A: REMOVAL move it from arm. CAUTION: When replacing the wiper blade, if standing up the wiper arm, be sure to stand up the driver’s side wiper arm first, and then passenger’s side wiper arm next.
Page 851 asieps_tobira.book 11 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Wiper Blade WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS D: ASSEMBLY 2) Insert the wiper rubber until its top end protrudes approx. 20 mm (0.79 in) from stopper D. 1. FRONT 1) Insert the wiper rubber onto the blade so that the stopper is in the position shown in the figure.
Page 852 asieps_tobira.book 12 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Washer Tank and Motor WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 5. Washer Tank and Motor D: ASSEMBLY 1) Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. A: REMOVAL 2) Confirm that water does not leak from installa- 1) Open the front hood. tion area of motor.
Page 853 asieps_tobira.book 13 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Washer Tank and Motor WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 5) Using a tester, measure the resistance of the washer fluid level sensor. (1) Turn over the mud guard. (2) Measure the resistance of the washer fluid level sensor. WW-00918 Terminal Amount of washer fluid in the...
Page 854 asieps_tobira.book 14 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Wiper Relay Unit WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 6. Wiper Relay Unit C: INSPECTION A: REMOVAL 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the wiper arm. <Ref. to WW-15, RE- MOVAL, Front Wiper Arm.> 3) Remove the cowl panel.
Page 855 asieps_tobira.book 15 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Wiper Arm WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 7. Front Wiper Arm C: ADJUSTMENT Operate the wiper once. Align the wiper blade to A: REMOVAL ceramic print point mark (A) of front window panel. CAUTION: When standing up the wiper arm, be sure to stand up the driver’s side wiper arm first, and then passenger’s side wiper arm next.
Page 856 asieps_tobira.book 16 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Wiper Motor and Link WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 8. Front Wiper Motor and Link 2) When the battery is connected to the terminal of connectors, confirm that the wiper motor operates A: REMOVAL at high speed. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
Page 857 asieps_tobira.book 17 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Front Washer Nozzle WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 9. Front Washer Nozzle A: REMOVAL 1) Remove the front hood insulator. <Ref. to EB- 13, FRONT HOOD INSULATOR, REMOVAL, Front Hood.> 2) Hold the claw (A) of the washer nozzle towards the direction of the arrow, and remove the washer nozzle.
Page 858 asieps_tobira.book 18 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Wiper Arm WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 10.Rear Wiper Arm A: REMOVAL 1) Detach the wiper arm cover (A). 2) Remove the nut (B) to remove the wiper arm. WW-00430 B: INSTALLATION 1) Install in the reverse order of removal. 2) Operate the rear wiper once.
Page 859 asieps_tobira.book 19 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Wiper Motor WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 11.Rear Wiper Motor C: INSPECTION 1) Connect the battery to the wiper motor connec- A: REMOVAL tor and confirm that wiper motor operates. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery. 2) Remove the rear wiper arm.
Page 860 asieps_tobira.book 20 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 Rear Washer WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 12.Rear Washer A: REMOVAL 1) Detach the roof spoiler. <Ref. to EI-31, REMOV- AL, Roof Spoiler.> 2) Remove the washer hose from washer nozzle. 3) Push the claw of the nozzle from the reverse side of roof spoiler with a flat tip screwdriver or equivalent, and remove the washer nozzle.
Page 861 asieps_tobira.book 1 ページ２０１２年２月１０日　金曜日　午後３時２６分 ENTERTAINMENT Page General Description ...................2 Audio System .....................3 Front Accessory Power Supply Socket System .........4 Rear Accessory Power Supply Socket System ..........5 Navigation System ..................6 Rearview Camera System .................7 Multi-function Display (MFD) System ............8 Rear Entertainment System ...............9 Control Panel ...................10 Audio ......................14 Front Speaker ..................15...

Save PDF